Spruce: A Step-by-Step Guide to Upholstery and Design 9781612121376, 9781603429030, 1612121373

Table of contents :
Cover......Page 1
Contents......Page 7
Foreword by Grace Bonney......Page 10
Introduction......Page 11
Mix ’n’ Match Upholstery......Page 13
Chapter 1: Getting Inspired and Designing the Space......Page 16
Project 1: An American in Paris: Upholstering a Louis Chair......Page 27
Chapter 2: Design Plan and Yardage Estimate......Page 29
Chapter 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat......Page 37
Chapter 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat......Page 50
Chapter 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair......Page 64
Project 2: A New Pair of Slippers......Page 79
Chapter 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern......Page 81
Chapter 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding......Page 91
Chapter 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat......Page 103
Chapter 9: Upholstering a Channel Back......Page 111
Chapter 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair......Page 127
Chapter 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back......Page 135
Project 3: Spread Your Wings......Page 145
Chapter 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern......Page 147
Chapter 13: Spring Tying for a Loose Seat......Page 157
Chapter 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck......Page 164
Chapter 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric......Page 173
Chapter 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings......Page 184
Chapter 17: Upholstering the Inside Back......Page 196
Chapter 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim......Page 203
Chapter 19: Constructing a T-Cushion......Page 214
Project 4: Three-Seater Tune-Up......Page 227
Chapter 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded......Page 229
Chapter 21: Spring Tying with an Edge Wire......Page 242
Chapter 22: Padding a Straight Deck......Page 252
Chapter 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric......Page 261
Chapter 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms......Page 271
Chapter 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with......Page 284
Chapter 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing......Page 293
Chapter 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions......Page 303
Project 5: Ottoman Empire......Page 315
Chapter 28: Material Requirements for Diamond......Page 317
Chapter 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman......Page 327
Project 6: Topping It Off......Page 341
Chapter 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters,......Page 343
Appendix......Page 357
Setting Up Shop......Page 358
Stripping Furniture......Page 362
Sewing Tips and Tricks......Page 367
Glossary......Page 378
Resources......Page 394
Acknowledgments......Page 395
Contributors......Page 396
index......Page 397

Citation preview

spruce

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 1

A STE P- BY- ST EP g u i d e to up h o l ste ry a n d d es ign

7/9/13 11:47 AM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 2

7/9/13 11:47 AM

a st e p - by- st e p g u i d e to

u p h o l st e ry and design

Amanda Brown photography by Ryann Ford

ß

Storey Publishing

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 3

7/9/13 11:47 AM

The mission of Storey Publishing is to serve our customers by publishing practical information that encourages personal independence in harmony with the environment.

Edited by Deborah Balmuth and Pam Thompson Art direction and book design by Alethea Morrison Text production by Jennifer Jepson Smith Photography by © Ryann Ford, except for © Amanda Brown: 22, 23, 74, 75, 140, 141, 194, 222, 223, 310, 311, 359 (top l. & r.), 373 and 380 (welt cord foot), and 384 (zipper foot); © Nataliya Dvukhimenna/123RF.com: 319 (illustration background); and © 7io/iStockphoto.com: 13 (illustration background) Photo styling of interiors by Jenny O’Connor Illustrations by Allegra Lockstadt, with an additional illustration: 13 by © Amanda Brown Fabric pattern illustrations on iii (title), vi, vii, 6, 18, 22, 23, 70, 74, 75, 136, 140, 141, 218, 222, 223, 306, 310, 311, 332, and 348 by Allegra Lockstadt Cutting layout illustrations by Ilona Sherratt Indexed by Nancy D. Wood

© 2013 by Amanda Brown

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced without written permission from the p ­ ublisher, except by a reviewer who may quote brief passages or reproduce illustrations in a review with appropriate credits; nor may any part of this book be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or other — without written permission from the publisher. The information in this book is true and complete to the best of our knowledge. All recommendations are made without guarantee on the part of the author or Storey Publishing. The author and publisher disclaim any liability in connection with the use of this information. Storey books are available for special premium and promotional uses and for customized ­editions. For further information, please call 1-800-793-9396. Storey Publishing 210 MASS MoCA Way North Adams, MA 01247 www.storey.com Printed in China by Shenzhen Caimei Printing Co., Ltd. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L ibr ary

of

C ongress C ataloging - in -P ublication Data

Brown, Amanda, 1982– Spruce : a step-by-step guide to upholstery and design / by Amanda Brown. pages cm Includes index. ISBN 978-1-61212-137-6 (hardcover : alkaline paper) ISBN 978-1-60342-903-0 (ebook) 1. Upholstery. I. Title. TT198.B73 2013 747'.5—dc23 2013012590

Storey Publishing is committed to making environmentally responsible manufacturing decisions. This book was printed on paper made from sustainably harvested fiber.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 4

7/16/13 2:29 PM

Yard by yard, life is hard. Inch by inch, it’s a cinch. — U n k n own

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 5

7/9/13 11:47 AM

Contents foreword by grace bonney........................................................................................... 1 Introduction...................................................................................................................... 2 mix ’n’ match upholstery............................................................................................... 4 Chapter 1:

Getting Inspired and Designing the Space.......................................... 7

Project 1: An

American in Paris: Upholstering a Louis Chair....... 18

Chapter 2:

Design Plan and Yardage Estimate................................................ 20

Chapter 3:

Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat................................................ 28

Chapter 4:

Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat........................................ 41

Chapter 5:

Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair................................................................... 55

Project 2: A

New Pair of Slippers................................................................. 70

Chapter 6:

Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern................................... 72

Chapter 7:

Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat............................................................................. 82

Chapter 8:

Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat............................. 94

Chapter 9:

Upholstering a Channel Back....................................................... 102

Chapter 10: Finishing Chapter 11:

the Frame of the Slipper Chair................................... 118

Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels....................................................................................... 126

Project 3: Spread Chapter 12:

Your Wings.......................................................................136

Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern...................................... 138

Chapter 13: Spring

Tying for a Loose Seat........................................................ 148

Chapter 14: Padding Chapter 15: Sewing

a T-Shaped Deck...............................................................155

and Attaching the Deck Fabric...................................... 164

Chapter 16: Upholstering Chapter 17:

the Inside Arms and Wings................................. 175

Upholstering the Inside Back........................................................ 187

Chapter 18: Finishing

the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim..................................................................194

Chapter 19: Constructing

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 6

a T-Cushion.............................................................205

7/9/13 11:47 AM

Project 4: Three-Seater

Tune-Up.........................................218

Chapter 20: Determining

Yardage for Railroaded Fabric............................................................................220

Chapter 21: Spring

Tying with an Edge Wire........................... 233

Chapter 22:

Padding a Straight Deck..........................................243

Chapter 23:

Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band............................................................ 252

Chapter 24: Padding

and Constructing Boxed Arms............. 262

Chapter 25: Upholstering

an Inside Back with Back Cushions........................................................... 275

Chapter 26: Attaching

the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame...........................................................284

Chapter 27: Fitting

and Sewing Boxed Cushions....................294

Project 5: Ottoman

Empire..................................................... 306

Chapter 28: Material

Requirements for Diamond Tufting and Leather Upholstery 101.................... 308

Chapter 29: Diamond

project 6: Topping

Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman..............318

It Off........................................................... 332

Chapter 30: Sewing

Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows.....................................................334

Appendix........................................................................................ 348 Setting up Shop...................................................................... 349 Stripping Furniture.............................................................. 353 Sewing Tips and Tricks......................................................... 358 Glossary................................................................................. 369 Resources............................................................................... 385 Acknowledgments......................................................................... 386 Contributors.................................................................................. 387 Index.................................................................................................. 388

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 7

7/9/13 11:47 AM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 8

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

1

Foreword I’ve been known to saythat if I ever won the lottery, the first thing I would do is have all of my furniture upholstered in beautiful patterned fabric. And if I had my first choice of upholsterers, that person would be Amanda Brown. When I was younger, I thought of upholstery as something only fancy or stuffy people had done. I remembered all of the scratchy formal couches my grandparents had and couldn’t imagine ever being interested in such a thing. But in 2003, everything changed. I moved to Brooklyn, started immersing myself in the design world, and was blown away by all of the beautiful textile designs coming out from younger artists. Their fabrics were affordable, fun, and the opposite of stuffy. But unfortunately, no one seemed to be doing anything with them other than making pillow after pillow. Then I discovered Spruce. Amanda Brown led the wave of upholsterers who started looking at found and vintage furniture and reimagining it with bold, contemporary fabrics. In Amanda’s skillful hands, old sofas, chairs, and ottomans were transformed into hip new furniture for younger families, and the community noticed. Spruce may have started as a local Austin business, but the influence of Amanda’s work and taste has spread across the country. Whether you’re looking to reupholster your very first thrift store score or want to tackle every piece of furniture in your home, Amanda can teach you how. But she doesn’t stop there. Her ideas for combining different fabrics and using found materials like vintage embroideries will open your eyes to all of the incredible ways you can give your old or used furniture new life. Trust Amanda. She’s been teaching students to reupholster for years now and you’re all about to get a master class from a seriously talented — and tastemaking — master.

— Grace Bonney, founder of Design* Sponge

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 1

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

2

Introduction Several years ago,I lived in the quaintest garage apartment behind an old historic home in Austin, Texas. It had dormers, parquet floors, and just enough space for me, my cat, and the collection of treasures, new and old, I had accumulated over the years. One weekend, while I was away visiting family, an electrical spark caused a fire and burned it to the ground. I was devastated. According to my insurance coverage, I could replace my treasures and furniture but had only a year. I tried to recreate my old space, with its vintage lamps, artwork, and furniture, all of which had been purchased on a shoestring budget from every hole-in-the-wall store between Austin and Lubbock. I quickly ran out of time and was forced into the big-box store. I purchased a chair, ottoman, sofa, and coffee table in a single day. White, beige, and blue. They didn’t last long, and I don’t mean they broke or wore out. Instead, I traded out, one by one, new for old, shapeless for shapely, until I had collected a living room of old furniture desperate for a makeover, but budding with potential. I had “upholstered” a sofa once in college. It was $10.81 + tax from the Thrift Store for the Blind. My sister and two other roommates dragged it to our dorm room and used a cheap blue and beige plaid fabric to cover its stained exterior. Every piece of fabric was attached with safety pins, and we kept the sofa pushed against the wall to hide the abrupt termination of our upholstery job. After the fire, I had moved into a real house, was working my first real job, and didn’t want to push every piece of furniture against the wall, so I saved up the money to have a professional upholsterer do the deed. After the transformation of the first few pieces, my living room redo turned into an obsession. Each new piece prompted my search for another diamond in the rough and the next best fabric. The Spruce seed had sprouted. I could do this every day! I could be my own boss, sell rejuvenated vintage furniture, and quit the job that was leaving my creative bones dissatisfied. I enrolled in three upholstery classes at the local community college and learned how to upholster the professional way (without safety pins). Before the end of the third class, I was taking clients and working graveyard shifts after my day job. I learned enough from my classes to get by, but I still felt unprepared for some ­projects. I searched high and low for videos, books, and any instruction to help me make my way into the upholstery profession. I found books, but as a beginner I was too new to understand the lingo, and the books I could understand were not thorough enough to help me with the nitty-gritty. I found a series of videos, which I watched only to discover unprofessional methods and lingering moments watching the wall. (Apparently the cameraman fell asleep, too!)

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 2

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

3

There was nothing to it but to do it. And I did. I quit my job and spent the next few years filling in the holes the hard way. It was the boot camp of upholstery. Twelve-hour days, six to seven days a week, fussing over padding, puckers, and pleats. I’m not going to lie: there were moments of tears, cussing, and breakdowns, but they were always followed by triumph and the euphoria that comes with making something beautiful with your own hands. And my projects comforted me after each battle. It was laborious, but it was love. For every piece I recreated, I had a new set of skills, a new happy customer, a new design, and a new space. Through upholstery, I could make any design — ­traditional, modern, or eclectic — and I quickly realized that upholstered furniture is the root of an interior. Not only can a sofa encourage midday naps, movie marathons, and all-night shindigs with friends, it also sets the mood of a room. An antique settee with a silk damask fabric may persuade you to sit up straight and be on your best behavior, but a plush, slipcovered sectional lets your guard down. Restyling Grandma’s old chair with your favorite fabric preserves the memories and transforms the “I would never put that in my house” chair into your favorite reading spot. You can hire the local upholsterer to redo the chair for you, but you can’t begin to understand the design choices at your disposal without understanding the skills of the trade. Through every upholstered piece you complete comes this understanding and the sense of how upholstery changes the look and feel of a room. Whether you have one piece you want to redo, you’re opening your own upholstery shop, or you’re an interior designer looking for ways to spruce up and incorporate a client’s old piece, with this book you can dive into five advanced projects that between them teach all the skills you need to tackle any modern-day upholstery project — from spring-tying to channel-making, from cushion-sewing to diamond-tufting. And we’ll top it off by sewing a variety of throw pillows! If you have a particular piece you don’t see in the lineup, don’t worry. Turn the page to check out Mix ’n’ Match Upholstery for guidance that will help you redo any piece. Today, we’re surrounded by mass-produced furniture with no consideration for our personal tastes and needs. I’m not the same person as 1,000 other people with the same sofa, so why should my furniture be? Step outside the box. Search through Grandpa’s garage. Take a stroll through the local thrift store. Find that piece that encourages you to make a change.

Note: The first appearance of each word that may be unfamiliar to you is bold. Find these terms in the glossary at the back of the book.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 3

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

Mix ’n’ Match Upholstery

4

Mix and match instructions to help you redo any piece. To get your wheels turning, check out the projects below, which we’ve color coded to guide you straight to the instructions you need for a particular component of your furniture. Bon voyage!

Ch. 21–23, pages 233–257 Ch. 16, pages 175–186 Ch. 18, pages 194–199 Ch. 27, pages 294–305 Ch. 3–4, pages 28–54 Ch. 23, pages 258–261 Ch. 17, pages 187–192 Ch. 26, pages 284–288 Ch. 17, pages 187–192; Ch. 29, pages 318–329 Ch. 11, pages 133–135 Ch. 13–15, pages 148–174 Ch. 5, pages 55–57, 63–67 Ch. 19, pages 205–217 Ch. 7–8, pages 82–101 Ch. 9, pages 102–117 Ch. 29, pages 318–329 Ch. 11, pages 126–132

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 4

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

5

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 5

7/9/13 11:47 AM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 6

7/9/13 11:47 AM

Chapter 1

page

7

Getting Inspired and Designing the Space In October 2010, I made a house call to repair a buttonthat had popped off a sofa. My customer, Jack, had a charming one-acre, off-the-beaten-path abode with a spring-fed pond and big trees, all within ten minutes of downtown Austin. I gushed over the natural beauty of the area and its proximity to downtown, so after repairing the button, he took me on a walk through the neighborhood, all eleven houses. At the other end of the street, a house was foreclosed. Jack said, “I can’t recommend the house, but it would at least get you into the neighborhood until someone dies.” While listening to him tell the stories of the past 35 years and chuckling at his sense of humor, we trudged through the overgrown lawn and peeped in the windows of 4203 Afton Lane. I’m not being modest when I say it was a dump. In fact, that may not even do it justice. Broken windows, cracked slab, and an abandoned pool (or should I say frog pond?) were only a few of its better qualities. Yet somehow, I could see through its defects. The next day, I got a call from Jack. Another button had popped off the sofa, so I bartered on-site upholstery repair for dinner and another tour of the neighborhood, this time with my hubby. Let’s just say it was meant to be. The next night, Keith and I met Lee, Jack’s B.F.F. and our future across-the-street neighbor. We had dinner, drank wine, and stayed up way too late. Over the course of the next several months, we watched and waited for 4203 to go on the market, and in March 2011, we closed on the house. The next eleven months were a blur of bids, demo, and reconstruction. The living room was part of a 20-year-old add-on with an unrepairable cracked slab, so we knocked it off and worked with our architect to make a new space with tall ceilings, skylights, and a 12' tall fireplace. A Craigslist search for Mexican brick led me to a gentleman specializing in reclaimed architectural stone who had recently removed the travertine from the courtyard of the LBJ Presidential Library. In the back of his pickup was a large slab of the stone with hairline cracks, small holes, and

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 7

7/9/13 11:47 AM

natural imperfections. It was exactly what we needed to make a large statement in a subtle and modern way. Jemima Dawson, a fellow designer and friend, inspired the blue walls and the floors. She whisked into the construction site one day with her cup of tea and bag full of color fans and samples, and pulled out this amazing hardwood floor with incredible grain and a wide variety of colors. It’s also made of recycled furniture — a bit of an omen? The blue is a copy of Jemima’s living room walls, which makes me feel light and relaxed every time I go to her house (or is it the wine?). And the black wallpaper was a discovery we made on one of our many Afton Lane rendezvous, the perfect dichotomy of light and dark. We had begun to lay the groundwork for a completely personal space. So this is where we begin. An empty room can be a large hurdle . . . or an opportunity to create a completely original space. Rooms have a way of falling into place when you listen to your gut. It may seem less daunting to start with the small decisions first and work your way up, but I find it’s best to dive in headfirst and let the details float to the top. Just like the color of my room. I knew I loved it, so I pulled the trigger without considering any other factors. If you’re drawn to a color, paint it. If you have a favorite chair or piece of furniture with sentimental value, focus on it first.

page

8

Travertine salvaged from the LBJ Presidential Library

Black wallpaper adds unexpected contrast to the space

the empty room

Wall color inspired by a friend’s house

Flooring made from recycled furniture

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 8

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

Start with the pieces that are sure bets, like the corner pieces of a puzzle.

9

When I moved into the house, I had an old sofaI had found at an antique mall. It had become my favorite hangout, so I made it my first and only focus. As I was browsing through fabric samples one day, an orange velvet jumped out of the stack. I wanted to start with a bold stroke, but not one that would railroad every other decision. I brought the fabric home, held it next to the sofa, floors, and wall color to make sure it was good fit, and ordered it the next day. My other nonnegotiable was the dragon fabric. I’ve never considered myself a dragon lover, but as I look around my house, I realize that there are several dragons to be found. Then it’s no surprise that Jim Thompson’s Enter the Dragons fabric knocks my socks off. I had been trying to find a place for this fabric for a while, so when the opportunity arose to redo my own space, it was a no-brainer; I had to use it. The scale of this pattern is best suited for larger furniture, so I searched high and low and found a curvy wingback with just the right dimensions to solidify my second decision.

The sure bets

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 9

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

10

After your first few unrestricted decisions, make a practical one. Since I’m a bona fide furniture addict,minimalism has never been an option for me. I was far from finished with the new living room. I had blue walls, black wallpaper, an orange sofa, and to top it all off, a fire-breathing dragon. With my absolute must-haves on the table, it was time for a calculated move, one that could bring order to chaos, and more importantly, give me just enough leeway to add in a few more whimsical pieces before calling it a day. Practical decisions come in all shapes and sizes. For most, it has more to do with being “reasonable” — like buying something that lasts a long time or is washable or comfortable. In design, aesthetics always play a role in practicality. It’s about creating a visual balance with color, pattern, and proportions that is pleasing to the eye. It has less to do with the amazing stand-alone piece and more to do with what is needed to create harmony in the room. With symmetry, you can create order without compromising personality. All you need is two of the same thing. It can be a pair of beige armchairs or a pair of floral armchairs, and either way, it creates a visual balance. To make my haphazard lineup look thoughtful and planned, I found a pair of slipper chairs on eBay to counter the weight of the sofa. But just adding a pair of chairs to the room was not quite enough to do the trick. I went one step further and chose black and white fabric to dilute the color in the room while adding a playful speckled pattern to support the sprightly scene I’d created so far.

The practical choice

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 10

7/9/13 11:47 AM

Don’t forget functionality.

page

11

Clearly, I was still missing an essential componentin the living room: the coffee table. Acrylic, glass, metal, wood — I had thought of every possibility, then remembered the run-in with my last coffee table. It was wooden, sleek, and stylish, but we were constantly covering it with throw pillows to soften the top. The first thing Keith and I do when we get home is plop down in the living room, kick up our feet, and relax. The coffee table plays a big part in this daily routine, so it had to be sturdy, cleanable, and soft. I found an old coffee table whose base I liked and made a new top to suit our needs. In a living room, what good is the visual appeal if it’s not usable? Functionality is different for every homemaker. I’m not suggesting that all coffee tables should be replaced with ottomans. I’m just saying, think about what you consider comfortable and what you plan to do in your space. Do you entertain frequently? Do you watch television? Do you take naps in your living room? Your furniture should work for you and help facilitate your daily activities.

functionality

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 11

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

12

Tie up the loose ends. Stuff. noun, 1. property, as personal belongings or equipment. We all have it; we all use it. It may require additional dusting, but it’s essential for making a room personal and lived in. It’s that bit of dissonance in a “perfect” space that encourages people to let their guards down. Nothing breaks the bound­ aries of rigid formality like a homeless piece of furniture, or as I call it, the floating chair. At a moment’s notice, my Louis chair can be pulled up to the sofa, fireplace, or ottoman, and its multilingual stripe enables it to join in every conversation. With its inherent flexibility, it encourages guests to move around, get comfortable, and personalize the space. There’s always that one place you want to sit but can’t or that one conversation that’s one seat too short, and the floating chair effortlessly saves the day. As for the rest of the stuff, I had linen curtains with a black border made to tie in the wallpaper from the adjoining room and designed a dragon rug in neutral tones to soften the hard floors and add an element of surprise (and dragons of course!). The pillows join in the ensemble to harmonize the overall design, connecting colors, patterns, and textures from across the room, and the knickknacks are an accumulation of objects that entertain me, make me smile, or remind me of a moment in time. When it comes down to the tiniest details, don’t force it. You don’t have to go from nothing to something overnight. And always make sure you leave real estate open for adding to the collection of treasures.

flexibility

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 12

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

13 accents and accessories

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 13

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

moving day

14

A lightweight chair you can move anywhere in the room breaks rigid formality.

Sleek shelves store stuff without weighing down the room.

Linen curtains with a black border tie in to the wallpaper in the adjoining room.

Reflect light and height by adding mirrors above eye level.

Be sure the scale of the fabric’s pattern suits the piece of furniture.

A rug softens the floor. The dragon motif adds an element of surprise.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 14

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

15

Make at least one bold move to personalize a room and surprise visitors.

Symmetry brings order to a space. I used pairs of slipper chairs, shelves, and mirrors.

Shed some light on a lone chair to lure a sitter. Choose your furniture to fit your lifestyle. Our coffee table doubles as an ottoman.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 15

7/9/13 11:47 AM

page

16

the completed space!

Always leave room for adding to your collection of knickknacks.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 16

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

17

Pillows connect colors, patterns, and textures across the room.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 17

7/9/13 11:48 AM

Project 1

An American in Paris: Upholstering a Louis Chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 18

7/9/13 11:48 AM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 19

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

20

Chapter 2

Design Plan and Yardage Estimate From the squarish, tall back chairsof Louis XIV to the curvaceous lines of Louis XV, no sitting room is complete without a touch of French classic style. With the lineup planned for the living room, I knew I needed a small stand-alone piece that could be moved around to fulfill any task, whether it be a Sunday afternoon reading in my mini library or joining in a card game around the cocktail ottoman. I snatched up this Neoclassical knock-off at a local consignment shop and headed back to the house to test it out. No disrespect to Louis XIII to XV, but Louis XVI got it right when it comes to my living room needs. In a space accommodating four other sizes, shapes, and styles of upholstered furniture, the chair needed to be on the smaller side but not too small, decorative without being ornate, and comfortable enough to allow me to enjoy the better part of a New York Times bestseller. With exposed wood, the chair balances the large swaths of fabric found on every other piece while still having enough surface area to display color and texture. The shapely back and seat complement the roundness of the slipper chairs and contrast nicely with the rectangular shapes of the sofa and cocktail ottoman. This piece fills the position quite well. I spent an afternoon with Louis catching up on the latest issues of Elle Décor and House Beautiful and decided that the seat was too puny to become a regular hangout for my derrière. As it was purchased, the seat was constructed of webbing and foam. Not a terrible combination, but

louis chair

Before

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 20

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

21 louis chair Ch. 2: Design Plan and Yardage Estimate

an extra layer of coil springs beneath the padding will drastically improve the comfort of the seat. I’ll also change the color of the wood by refinishing the chair in a dark chocolate brown to coordinate with the other furniture in the room. If we were upholstering this piece for Louis XVI himself, we’d find the rarest and most intricately woven silk damask available, but since our tastes and selections are no longer shaped by those of the French monarchy, I’ll break tradition and upholster with a punchy neon velvet stripe by Designers Guild. The durability of velvet makes it a smart choice for a piece that gets its fair share of activity, and the weight of the material makes the chair seem more substantial, even though it’s the smallest piece in the room. Orange, green, and yellow connect to the sofa and ­cocktail ottoman and bring out the vivid accents of chartreuse and neon green highlighting the dragon on the wingback. The vibrancy of colors also makes the chair a striking stand-alone piece.

Trasimeno in Zinnia by Designers Guild

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 21

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

Take a stroll

through your local fabric store or surf the web for your next inspired textile. Online merchants such as eBay and Etsy have vintage fabrics in the form of curtains, tablecloths, and blankets eager to create the next showstopper.

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

I love how this herd adds movement to an otherwise humdrum rocking chair.

from the spruce archives

design inspiration

22

This antique chair was rescued from the rubble of Hurricane Katrina and jolted back to life with a vibrant pattern.

To greet guests as they enter the dining room, our client put her favorite fabric on the backs of her dining chairs and a practical solid on areas needing more stain resistance.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 22

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 23

from the spruce archives

Pair a bold, modern pattern with an antique piece to add an element of surprise to your space.

23

design inspiration

Add texture and dimension to a plain inside back with diamond tufting (see chapter 29).

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

Ch. 2: Design Plan and Yardage Estimate

louis chair

24

Parts of the Louis Chair A chair of this sizetypically requires 2 to 3 yards of fabric, but it’s always a good idea to measure each part, especially when working with a patterned fabric.

arm pad

arm pad inside back

outside back

seat

1. Start by writing down the parts of the chair: • • • •

Seat Inside back (ISB) Outside back (OSB) Arm pads

3. The depth of the seat begins at the back of the chair and ends at the front (26").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 24

2. Always measure the largest dimensions of each piece. On the seat, extend the measuring tape from one side to the other to determine the width (29½").

4. Measure the width across the plumpest part of the inside back (19").

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

25 louis chair Ch. 2: Design Plan and Yardage Estimate

5. Measure from the top to the bottom of the

6. Record the width (17") and height (19") of the

inside back for the height (20").

outside back.

7. The arm pads on this chair are so small we’ll

8. The highlighted columns list the total widths

skip measurements and use scraps of fabric to upholster them.

and heights/depths of fabric needed for pulling and stapling. Since we’re using coil springs, I’ve added an additional 2" to each seat measurement to accommodate the extra plumpness.

Louis Chair Measurements Fabric Piece

Width

Allowance

Final Width

Height/Depth

Allowance

Final Height/Depth

Seat

29½"

4"

33½"

26"

4"

30"

ISB

19"

2"

21"

20"

2"

22"

OSB

17"

2"

19"

19"

2"

21"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 25

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

Ch. 2: Design Plan and Yardage Estimate

louis chair

26

Calculating Yardage Although stripes can be orientedvertically or horizontally, velvet has nap, which determines its direction. Run your hand across the velvet from top to bottom and side to side to determine the most obvious difference in the feel of the velvet. In most cases, the nap of the velvets runs off the roll as opposed to railroaded (see page 229), and this is true for this velvet stripe. This fabric is softest and

331⁄2"

30"

Seat fabric

21"

22"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 26

smoothest when I run my hand from the top near the roll toward the cut edge of the fabric. In this scenario, the fabric should be oriented with the stripes running vertically and the top edge of each piece closest to the fabric roll. For the most contrast and striking positioning of the stripes, I will center two chocolate brown stripes down the chair inside back and seat.

ISB fabric

19"

OSB fabric

21"

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

27

calculate the total number of yards needed (1.44).

12. Since we still need arm pads and double welt cord to cover the exposed staples around the seat, inside back, and arms, we’ll round up to finalize our yardage estimate at 2 yards of fabric.

10. Add the final height of the seat to the final height of the inside back (30" + 22" = 52").

OVERVIEW

Supplies for the Louis Chair

Basic supplies

• • • • • • • • • • •

3/8" staples 1⁄2" staples 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Button twine Paper Pencil Permanent marker Spray adhesive Spring twine Thread White or yellow chalk

Tools & equipment

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Air blower Button needle Double-welt cord foot attachment Electric carving knife Goggles High-heat glue gun and glue Klinch-It with Klinch-It staples (optional) Magnetic tack hammer Measuring tape Pliers Regulator Scissors Sewing machine

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 27

• • • • • • • •

Square Square-point upholstery knife Staple gun Staple remover Utility knife Webbing stretcher Welt cord stick (optional) Yardstick

Ch. 2: Design Plan and Yardage Estimate

11. Divide the total from step 10 by 36" (1 yard) to

determining which pieces can be placed side by side for the most efficient use of fabric and appropriate pattern placement. This fabric is 54" wide with a horizontal repeat of 9", so I will place the seat on its own width of fabric with the two back pieces side by side and directly beneath.

louis chair

9. When determining yardage, the first step is

Materials

• • • • • • • • • • • •

12 yards 5/32" fiber flex welt cord 2 yards fabric 1⁄2 slab 2"-thick high-density foam 1⁄4 slab 2"-thick low-density foam 11⁄2 yards burlap 1 yard cardboard tack strip 9 coil springs 2 yards cotton batting 11⁄2 yards 27"-wide Dacron 1 yard dustcover 1 yard 3⁄4" edge roll 8 yards jute webbing For more information on tools and materials, visit the glossary (page 369).

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

28

Chapter 3

Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat Before springs, seats were padded w  ith natural materials such as horsehair, cotton, and hay. It wasn’t until the 1800s that coils were used to pad upholstered furniture. Initially, soft iron and poor tying techniques caused springs to lose resiliency and shift around with use, resulting in a lumpy and uncomfortable seat. Two centuries later, we’ve learned how to manipulate springs with an eight-way tie that anchors them in place, so they provide maximum support and comfort for many years. As I did with this Louis chair, you can add coil springs to any piece of furniture. If you’re content with your furniture as is, it’s not necessary to add coil springs, but keep them in mind for those pieces requiring a little more cush for your tush. If you donʼt have or want coil springs, see page 39.

louis chair

Stripped to the frame

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 28

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

29 louis chair

Attaching Webbing Supplies Goggles Jute webbing Staple gun 1/2" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Magnetic tack hammer 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks

Safety Tip: When stapling or hammering

tacks, always protect those baby blues with a pair of goggles or prescription glasses. Otherwise, deflected staples and tacks can be a total eyesore.

2. Evenly space the strips of webbing on each side of the frame. With the webbing connected to the roll, attach the cut end with 4 or 5 staples to the center of the wooden bar where it’s strongest. Leave a few extra inches of webbing beyond the staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 29

1. Jute webbing provides the foundation for the springs and all the padding on the seat, not to mention the sitter. With the chair flipped over, determine the maximum number of strips, without overlap, that will fit horizontally and vertically on the bottom edges of the chair. My hand is the same width as the webbing, so I use it as a measuring device.

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

• • • • • • • •

3. Fold back the excess webbing and staple again.

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

louis chair

30

4. Pull the webbing across the frame and over the opposite side. Hold the webbing stretcher against the edge of the chair with the handle up at a slight angle. Bring the webbing over and through the teeth of the webbing stretcher, then pull the handle down until the webbing is tight.

6. Cut the webbing from the roll a few inches beyond the staples. Fold back the excess and staple again.

7. Repeat steps 2–6 until all vertical strips of webbing are attached.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 30

5. When the webbing is tight enough to resist movement with pressure, secure it in place with 4 or 5 staples.

8. For the horizontal strips, weave the cut end over and under each vertical strip until it reaches the side. Staple, fold back the excess, and staple again. Repeat steps 4–6 to attach the opposite end. If you started by weaving over, under, over the vertical strips, weave the adjacent strip under, over, under. Continue alternating the weaving pattern and attaching the webbing until all the horizontal strips are in place.

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

31

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

all four sides, hammer three upholstery tacks on top of every end of webbing. Use 10-ounce tacks for pieces with petite frames and 12-ounce tacks for bigger pieces, such as large armchairs and sofas. Tap the tack in place with the magnetic side of the magnetic tack hammer, then flip the head around to hammer it in the rest of the way.

louis chair

9. When the webbing is attached to

3/8" v. 1/2" Staples As you work through the projects, you’ll notice a change in the length of staples used for ­different parts. The longer 1/2" staples are used for layers that are structural or receive a lot of pressure, such as seat webbing and spring twine. They’re also better for attaching exterior layers that have multiple layers of webbing, fabric, and other materials beneath them. If they’re stronger, why wouldn’t we use 1/2" staples all the time? On some furniture, 1/2" staples are too long, going all the way through or splintering the wood. Also, 1/2" staples are more expensive. It may seem negligible, but over the lifetime of your upholstering, you’ll use millions of staples, and it adds up.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 31

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

louis chair

32

Hand-Sewing Coil Springs to Webbing For a small project like this,hand sewing is a relatively quick and easy way to attach springs to webbing, but for larger projects like the sofa, it can add hours of time. Visit page 237 to see how easily springs are attached with the Klinch-It, a tool made specifically for stapling springs to webbing.

10. Turn the chair right side up and evenly space the coil springs on top of the webbing. You may notice that one end is bent down or bound to the spring. This end should be at the top and oriented to the same position on every spring. In other words, if the end is toward two o’clock, all the ends should be pointed toward two o’clock.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 32

Supplies • • • •

Coil springs Button twine Scissors Button needle

11. Attach each spring to the webbing at three evenly spaced points around the bottom rung. To do this, cut a 20-inch length of button twine and thread the end through the eye of the button needle. Tie a knot around the eye to keep the twine from slipping out.

7/9/13 11:48 AM

page

33 louis chair

13. Pull the needle and twine up through the web-

the springs. Pull through the twine until there’s approximately 4" of twine left above the webbing.

bing on the other side of the spring.

14. Tie a double-knot around the spring to anchor

15. Insert the needle next to the spring and pull

the end of twine in place.

the twine through. Bring the needle and twine up through the webbing on the other side of the spring. Repeat this step until you have made three loops around that part of the spring. After the third loop, pull the twine through the webbing and bring it up at the next attachment point at the bottom rung of the spring.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 33

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

12. Insert the button needle right next to one of

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

louis chair

34

16. Repeat step 15 to stitch the other two points of the spring to the webbing. After the third point is sewn, bring the needle and twine up through the webbing where you started on step 12. Tie off the ends with a double-knot to complete the attachment of the spring.

17. Repeat steps 11–16 to attach all other springs. When they’re anchored in place, they should be firm to the webbing and resist movement. From the underside of the webbing, there should be a triangle of button twine beneath every spring where you attached the spring across three locations.

Tying the Springs Supplies • • • • • • •

Goggles Magnetic tack hammer 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Spring twine Scissors 1/2" staples Staple gun

18. Hammer in halfway two tacks at the ends of every horizontal and vertical row of springs. The tacks should be on the topside of the frame near the center of the wooden bar.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 34

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

35 louis chair

20. Place the middle loop of the doubled twine

21. Fold the loop back and around each tack.

22. Pull the ends of twine tightly toward the

in between a pair of tacks on the backside of the chair.

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

19. Measure and cut a length of doubled-over spring twine for each vertical and horizontal row of springs. The doubled twine should be long enough to reach from one set of tacks to the other with an extra 4" per spring in the row. (I added 12" to every row of three springs.)

center of the chair to cinch the loops around the tacks and hammer them down to hold the twine in place.

23. Repeat steps 20–22 for all pairs of tacks on the back and one side of the frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 35

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

louis chair

36

Tying Vertical Rows With spring tyingfor a tight seat, our goals are to compress the springs as tightly as we can, make a slightly domed shape to the seat, and keep each spring centered on its vertical axis for maximum support. To accomplish this, the middle spring will be slightly higher and the outside edges of the outer springs lower. When we start and finish the second strand of twine in the row, we’ll tie a knot around the top and second rungs to bring down the height of the outside edges.

Vertical axes should be upright with top rungs centered over bottom rungs.

Always tie vertical rows of springs from the back to the front. When tying horizontally, make life easier by working in the direction of your dominant hand.

24. Start with the back middle spring. From the

25. Make a loose knot around the backside of the

back of the chair, bring the left strand of twine under the second rung from the top and up through the middle of the spring.

second rung from the top.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 36

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

37 louis chair

27. When the spring is in the correct position, release your dominant hand and pull the end of twine to tighten the knot. If you’re having a hard time compressing the spring, tighten the knot while the spring is leaning slightly toward the back of the chair. When you pull the twine forward, the spring will have to compress lower to be centered on its vertical axis.

28. From the second rung, move to the top rung

29. Continue tying knots to both sides of the top

of the opposite side and repeat steps 25–27 to tie the knot.

rung of every spring until you reach the last side of the last spring, where you’ll skip down to the second rung and tie a knot. When the last knot is tied, loop the twine around the left tack and leverage your hand against the frame to pull the springs down. Pull out the slack in the twine as you lower the springs to the desired height. Then hammer down the tack to hold the springs in place.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 37

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

26. To tighten the knot while the spring is compressed in place, tightly pull the twine straight from the tack with your dominant hand while the index finger of your nondominant hand holds the twine against the bottom of the second rung.

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

louis chair

38

30. Repeat steps 24–27 to make a knot around both the second and top rungs with the right strand of twine. It should be easier to tie knots with the second strand of twine since the springs are already held in place.

31. Repeat steps 28 and 29 to tie knots to both

32. The first row is really important in deter-

33. Repeat steps 24–32 to tie the other vertical

mining the overall height of the springs. Are the springs centered over themselves from back to front? Do they compress no more than 1"–2" with strong pressure? If the answer is “No” to either question, go back and make adjustments to correct the positioning. To finish the row of springs, add a few staples to the ends of twine to hold them in place, in case a tack should pop out, and cut off the excess twine.

rows of springs. As you compress the springs, match the height to the adjacent rows.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 38

sides of every spring. On the last side of the last spring, tie the knot around both the second and top rungs. Then wrap the end of twine around the right tack and hammer it down.

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

With horizontal rows,we need to compress the springs even more, and tie the springs so they rest in an upright position with the top rungs centered over the bottom rungs.

34. Repeat steps 24–33 to tie the horizontal rows. After the springs are tied, inspect them to make sure they’re upright. Go back and retie any springs that are leaning.

louis chair

Tying Horizontal Rows

39

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

What if I don’t have coil springs in my tight seat? With a tight seat like the Louis chair, you may come across a few other constructions that require a slightly different order of operations. As discussed in the previous chapter, this chair originally came with a layer of webbing topped by the padding. If this is the type of chair you have, follow the instructions for attaching webbing but attach it to the topside of the frame instead of the bottom. Then skip to the next chapter for padding and upholstering the seat. If you found zigzag or sinuous springs when you stripped your piece, follow steps 1–9 (pages 83–85) to tie the sinuous springs. Continue your process with the following chapter.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 39

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Ch. 3: Tying Coil Springs for a Tight Seat

louis chair

40

Tying Diagonal Rows At this point,we have completed a four-way tie, but we’ll tie the springs diagonally in both directions to add even more stability and help shape the dome of the seat. Diagonal rows are the easiest of all since we’ve already secured the springs in place with the vertical and horizontal rows. I recommend completing the diagonal rows in one direction before setting the tacks and twine for the other direction. It can get very confusing remembering which tacks go with which row.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 40

35. Use your arm to envision the line the twine will make when the springs are tied diagonally, and hammer in halfway a pair of tacks at both ends of the diagonal rows. It may be difficult to place the tacks in the perfect location. Just get as close as you can to the ideal spot. Repeat steps 19–23 to attach the twine and tie the diagonal rows toward the front of the chair.

36. Repeat steps 24–33 to tie the diagonal rows in one direction.

37. Repeat steps 35 and 36 to tie the rest of the diagonal rows and complete the eight-way tie.

7/9/13 11:49 AM

Chapter 4

page

41

Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat Padding comes in all shapes and sizes.From horsehair to foam, each padding material has a unique set of characteristics that makes it good for specific applications. Check out the table below for a rundown of the most common padding materials used for seats and backs. (See “What’s in the fluff?” on page 335 for more information on materials used in throw pillows.) Because foam comes in a variety of densities and thicknesses, it is an ideal padding material for modern upholstery where comfort is key. Although lesser quality foams can have a limited lifespan of five years, higher quality foams can have three times the resiliency. For small chairs with coil springs, I typically use 2"-thick, high-quality foam with a firm density to pad the springs. You should never feel the springs through the padding, so the key is choosing a thickness that’s comfortable without ruining the proportions of the piece. And you might want to think about your environmentally friendly options, too (see page 193).

Common Padding Materials for Seats and Inside Backs Padding Material

Pros

Cons

Applications

Horsehair: hair from horses, permed for extra loft. Also available in a rubberized version.

Long-lasting

Loses shape with compression Expensive Attracts dust

Antique restoration

Cotton Batting: natural material from the cotton plant

Long-lasting Eco-friendly

Loses shape with compression

Spring unit cushions Shaping padding Filling in small areas of padding

Foam: most common padding material in modern upholstery. Made of a variety of materials, including polyurethane, soy, and natural latex.

Holds shape Economical Comes in different densities and thicknesses

Solidifies or disintegrates after many years of use

All

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 41

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

louis chair

42

Attaching Burlap Supplies • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Burlap Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Permanent marker

1. Measure the depth and width of the seat and cut out a piece of burlap large enough to cover the surface, with a few extra inches for pulling and stapling.

2. Center the burlap over the seat and staple the

3. Pull the burlap tightly toward the front of the chair and staple the center of the front edge.

4. Pull and staple the middles of both sides.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 42

back middle of the burlap to the top of the frame. Work around the tacks from spring tying, as these will deflect the staples.

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

43 louis chair

6. Fold under the excess burlap on either side of the post and staple it down.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the other three leg posts.

8. Fold back the excess burlap and staple it down

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 43

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

5. To release the burlap around the leg posts, you’ll need to make cuts at every corner. Smooth the excess burlap from the center of the seat to the back right post and fold back the excess burlap at a 45-degree angle. Make a cut in the excess burlap from the center of the seat to the inside corner of the post. This is also known as a T-cut.

on all sides.

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Release Cuts 101

44

Depending on the construction of your chair, you’ll need to make release cuts to work around certain parts of the furniture frame. With open armchairs, like the Louis chair, release cuts in fabric must be perfectly made to neatly tuck fabric under on either side of the arms and legs. Figure 1 illustrates the release cuts necessary for this chair, involving a T-cut straight to the inside corner of the post. In many cases, you’ll need to make a Y-cut to release fabric around the flat side of a post (see figure 2). Use these steps to determine which type of cut works best for your situation. 1. Smooth the material from the middle of your piece toward the post. 2. If the first part of the post you touch is the inside corner, perform a T-cut. 3. If the first part of the post you touch is a flat side, perform a Y-cut.

Tips for Successful Release Cuts 1. Use chalk to mark the release cut on fabric and double-check yourself before getting out the scissors. For hidden layers, like burlap and Dacron, use a permanent marker to draw cuts. 2. Make baby cuts until you reach the right depth to prevent yourself from going too far. 3. The edges of the Y should never extend beyond the edges of the post. If the Y-cut is the correct width but the fabric still puckers as you fold it around the post (indicating it needs to be a deeper cut), extend the ends of the Y straight back instead of making the Y wider (see figure 2). 4. When in doubt, use a scrap piece of fabric before cutting the real fabric. 5. Only perform one release cut at a time. Stabilize the material as much as possible before making a release cut and secure it in place by stapling on either side before moving on to the next one.

FIGure 1 T-cut

6. The point of a release cut is to release the fabric around obstacles while leaving enough fabric to fold under and hide raw edges. When the release cut is made, will you have enough fabric to cover the padding and fold under and hide the cut edge?

dotted lines for cutting

FIGure 3

Extending a Y-cut

FIGure 2 Y-cut

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 44

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

45

Supplies • • • • • •

3/4" edge roll Permanent marker Square-point upholstery knife Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

We attach edge roll to soften hard wooden edges where foam and padding wear out and disintegrate quickly. Although it’s most commonly used on the front and side edges of seats, smaller edge roll may also be placed around the front scrolls of chairs. For an open armchair, like the Louis chair, we’ll only place edge roll on the front edge since the sitter is prevented from crossing the sides of the seat due to the arms. Edge roll comes in a variety of sizes. Use ¾"-diameter edge roll for small pieces and 1" or larger for big armchairs and sofas.

louis chair

Attaching Edge Roll

staples

FIGure 1 edge roll

½" tail of edge roll

outside edge

inside edge of wooden frame

9. Position the edge roll with the tail on the bottom going in toward the middle of the chair. The cut end should begin ½" from arm or leg posts. Line up the edge roll with the front edge of the chair and staple through the tail into the wooden frame (see figure 1).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 45

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

louis chair

46

10. Before you reach the other end, use the square-­ point upholstery knife to remove the excess edge roll ½" shy of the post. Continue stapling to the end.

11. Stabilize the front side of the edge roll by pinching off and stapling small sections to the front of the wooden beam. See pages 87 and 157 for more examples of attaching edge roll to the slipper chair and wingback.

staples edge roll

½" inside edge

outside edge of wooden frame To stabilize the front of the edge roll, firmly push the edge roll against the frame while pinching off and stapling small sections.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 46

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

In the last chapter, we createda slightly domed shape with our springs. With the padding, we’ll place multiple layers of cotton in a mound and cover them with foam and Dacron to accentuate the dome.

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • •

louis chair

Attaching Padding to the Tight Seat

47

2"-thick high-density foam Permanent marker Electric carving knife Burlap or scrap fabric Scissors Spray adhesive Cotton batting Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Utility knife Dacron 12. Place a piece of foam on top of the seat. Push down the edges and use the permanent marker to draw the shape of the seat on the underside of the foam.

13. Make a mark where the foam meets every leg post.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 47

14. Remove the foam from the chair and use the marks from the last step to draw the outline of the leg posts. With the carving knife, cut out the shape of the seat just beyond the marked line.

7/9/13 11:49 AM

page

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

louis chair

48

15. Place the foam on the chair and check the fit. The foam should extend slightly beyond the edges of the frame and meet the arm and leg posts without being squished in place. Make adjustments to the shape of the foam, if necessary.

16. To attach the foam to the chair, you’ll glue

17. Wait one minute for the spray adhesive to get tacky. Then flip the burlap forward and press it to the foam to stick the surfaces together. Repeat for the other four sides, avoiding the notches cut out of the foam for the leg posts. Place the foam to the side to allow the spray adhesive to dry completely.

18. Feel the surface of the seat to find any low

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 48

strips of burlap or scrap fabric (also known as pulls) to each edge of the foam, and then staple the pulls to the frame. Cut out a piece of burlap wide enough to cover the front edge of the foam and approximately 6" tall. Lay the burlap on top of the foam, 2" behind the front edge. Spray adhesive on the bottom 2" of the burlap and front 2" of the foam.

spots created by the gaps between springs. Use small pieces of cotton batting to fill in these dips.

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

49 louis chair

20. Cover the surface of the seat with a full layer

21. Center the foam on the seat and staple the

22. Pull the foam toward the front and staple the

middle of the back pull to the frame of the chair. The burlap should be pulled tightly enough to compress the square edge of the foam, making a smooth, round shape. Place staples just above the finished edge of the wood.

front middle. Make sure the foam extends to, or just beyond, the front of the edge roll.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 49

of cotton. Add two additional layers of cotton, and with each new layer, decrease the size by approximately 2" on every side. This will create a domed shape on the seat.

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

19. Build up the area behind the edge roll and around the perimeter of the seat with two layers of cotton batting.

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

louis chair

50

23. Pull and staple the middle of both sides. When the centers of all four sides are secure, go back and staple the rest of the pulls all the way around the chair.

24. To minimize bulk on the staple line, remove the excess burlap just beyond the staples with a utility knife.

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

You may be tempted to take a

break at this point, but it’s best to carry on until you have the rest of the padding attached. When left uncovered for an extended amount of time, pulls may become detached from the foam, especially in high humidity.

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

25. Before attaching fabric, smooth over p ­ adding imperfections with a single layer of bonded Dacron. Cut out a piece of Dacron large enough to cover the surface of the seat down to the finished wood or to the bottom edge of the seat if your fabric attaches to the underside of the frame. Anchor the center of the Dacron by spraying adhesive on it and the center of the foam and sticking them together.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 50

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

51 louis chair

steps 21–23 to secure the middle of all four sides. When stapling, split the Dacron layers in half and staple only the bottom half to the chair. The top half will cover the indentations made by the staples. If possible, keep staples at least ½" from the finished wood.

27. Repeat step 5 to perform a release cut at the back right leg post.

28. Instead of folding under the excess Dacron

29. Work out from the middle on every side to

from the release cut, cut it off flush to the legs. Repeat steps 27 and 28 to release the Dacron around the other three legs.

attach the Dacron all the way around the seat. Leave 1" from every leg unstapled then trim off the excess Dacron just past the staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 51

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

26. Smooth the Dacron over the seat and repeat

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

52

Attaching Fabric to the Tight Seat

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

This is always my favorite part,attaching the first piece of fabric and seeing the chair come back to life. Securing fabric is no different than securing Dacron, except that it’s less forgiving. Here are a few tricks for getting that perfectly smooth look. 30. Measure the seat at its widest and deepest

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Pencil Paper Fabric White or yellow chalk Air blower Square Yardstick Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Pliers Staple remover Utility knife

points. Before you get started, do a chalk test by making small marks on the fabric, one in white and one in yellow chalk; then use the air blower to determine which color comes out easiest. Use the square and yardstick to draw the edges of the seat fabric a few inches bigger than the measurements. As you draw, be mindful of how you’d like the pattern placed on the chair and remember that the nap of the velvet should feel smooth as your hand moves from the back to the front and top to bottom of the chair.

Pucker-Free Fabric Palms, not fingertips When pulling fabric to the appropriate tightness, smooth out the excess with the palm of your dominant hand while pulling the edge of the fabric with the palm of your nondominant hand. Avoid pulling fabric with fingertips, which creates dimples from uneven tightness. Stapling tips Fabric that staples directly to the wood is less likely to pucker, so keep the

area where the fabric attaches clear of padding and other staples when possible. Also, keep permanent staples close together so fabric is attached evenly across edges. Good vantage point In certain lighting, dimples and puckers may be invisible even

though they are present. Move your piece around as you work so you can easily see the tightness and smoothness of the fabric as you staple. When I staple the front edge of a chair, I lay the chair on its back so the front edge is at eye-level.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 52

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

53

Sub-Stapling To give ourselves some flexibility with fabric placement, we’ll use sub-staples when attaching fabric. To make the gun shoot a sub-staple, place one side of the nose against the wood while the other side is slightly up in the air. When you pull the trigger, one prong of the staple will go all the way into the wood while the other prong only goes in halfway. Sub-stapling allows us to easily remove staples and make adjustments without damaging the fabric.

permanent staple

sub-staple

31. Mark the middle front and back of the seat

32. Repeat steps 5–7 to release the fabric around

and fabric so you can easily position the fabric on the chair. Align the fabric with the front middle of the chair and sub-staple it next to the finished wood or to the underside of the frame if your piece doesn’t have exposed finished wood. Smooth and sub-staple the back middle and center of the sides, respectively.

one leg post. Smooth and sub-staple the fabric from the middle of an adjacent side toward the cut. As you approach the cut, fold under the excess fabric around the Dacron we left unstapled in step 29 and sub-staple the fabric in place. If you’re having trouble managing the excess fabric, try cutting some off to minimize the amount that must fold under. Repeat this step to attach the fabric and make release cuts on all four sides of the seat.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 53

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

Ch. 4: Padding and Upholstering a Tight Seat

louis chair

54

louis chair

33. When you’re happy with the placement, tightness, and smoothness of the fabric, use the pliers to remove a few inches of sub-staples at a time and replace them with permanent staples. Permanent staples should be as close to the finished wood as possible so they’re easily hidden by decorative trim.

34. Use the utility knife to trim off the excess ­fabric right above the finished wood.

Seat finished

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 54

7/9/13 11:50 AM

Chapter 5

page

55

Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair Between stripping, tying springs, padding,and upholstering the seat, the Louis chair may have been more time-consuming than you expected, but you’ll be happy to know that the arms and the inside and outside backs are swift parts of the process. As we did with the seat, we’ll staple the fabric near the finished edge of wood and cover the exposed staples with double welt cord (or decorative trim of your choice) at the end of the project. Since arms and backs receive less pressure than seats, we’ll pad them with soft, low-density foam supplemented with cotton. For arm pads, I typically use 1"–2"-thick foam, while backs look best with 2"–3" of foam over a few cotton layers to make a round, plump shape.

Padding and Upholstering the Arm Pads Supplies • • • • • • •

1"–2" thick low-density foam Permanent marker Electric carving knife Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Cotton batting

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 55

• • • • • •

Dacron Scissors Fabric Pliers Staple remover Utility knife

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

louis chair

56

1. Place a small piece of foam over one of the arms and use a permanent marker to trace its shape along the edge of the finished wood. Cut out the shape with a carving knife and use it to trace and cut out a second piece of foam for the other arm.

3. Cover each piece of foam with two or three ­layers of cotton batting.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 56

2. Since you staple the foam directly to the wood, you don’t need to attach pulls as you did with the seat. Hold the foam in place and staple through its side, between the top and bottom surfaces and into the wood. Keep the foam at least ¼" from the finished wood. When you pull the fabric tightly over the padding, the top surface of the foam will squish down to cover the indentations made by the staples. Repeat for the other arm.

4. To hold the cotton in place, cover it with a layer of Dacron that staples around the edge of the arm padding. Split and staple the Dacron as we did with the seat (see page 50), then cut off the excess just past the staples.

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

57 louis chair

6. Sub-staple the back and front of the arm with the pattern straight and centered. Smooth the fabric to the sides and staple the middles. Continue sub-stapling around the perimeter of the arm. In some cases, you may need to put pleats at the front and back of the arm to neatly fold under excess fabric (see page 110 for pleating).

louis chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 57

7. When the fabric is in the desired position, remove the sub-staples with pliers and a staple remover and replace with permanent staples. Remove the excess fabric with a utility knife.

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

5. Cut out a piece of fabric large enough to cover the arm with a few extra inches for pulling and stapling. It’s best to avoid light-colored fabric on arm pads since it’s a high-traffic area. Remember to orient the pattern and nap correctly: top toward the back of the chair, bottom to the front.

Arms finished

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

louis chair

58

Padding and Upholstering a Picture Back When the outside back of a chairpeeks through a finished frame and the staples are hidden behind the wood, you have a picture back. We begin in reverse order with ­picture backs, attaching the outside back fabric first, then padding and upholstering the inside back. We essentially upholster the outside back and inside back together, eliminating a lot of extra steps and time. Because the outside back is protected by the chair frame and gets very little wear and tear, picture backs are a great opportunity to think outside the box and showcase special materials, such as artwork on canvas or a vibrant coordinating fabric that’s too delicate or expensive to use on the whole chair. I’ve collected a stack of vintage needlepoints to spruce up my picture-back dining room chairs. On the other hand, picture backs can be an opportunity to save money by using a less expensive fabric if the back of your pieces are against a wall or not easily visible.

Create an heirloom piece by incorporating a special textile into your chair, such as this crewel art made by my mother.

Supplies • • • • • • • • •

2"-thick low-density foam Permanent marker Electric carving knife Burlap Scissors Dacron Spray adhesive Fabric White or yellow chalk

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 58

• • • • • • • • •

Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Pliers Staple remover Utility knife Jute webbing Webbing stretcher Cotton batting

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

59 louis chair

9. Use the foam to trace the shape of the inside back on the burlap. Cut out the burlap a few inches bigger than the foam.

10. Trace and cut out a piece of Dacron the same

11. Attach another piece of Dacron to the front face

size as the foam.

of the foam with spray adhesive.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 59

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

8. Hold a piece of foam against the inside back and use the permanent marker to trace the shape of the frame on the foam. Use the carving knife to cut out the shape.

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

louis chair

60

12. Trim off the excess Dacron even with the edge of the foam.

13. Repeat step 9 to trace in chalk and cut out two pieces of fabric a few inches bigger than the foam. Be mindful of nap and pattern placement as you trace.

14. Lay the chair on its back and mark the middles of the top and bottom on the inside back and fabric. Center the fabric on the chair with the good side facing the back and sub-staple the middle of every side. Continue sub-stapling around the edge of the back. As you staple, use extra caution to be sure that the staples are going into the unfinished wood and that no staples are visible from the back of the chair.

15. Before replacing sub- with permanent staples, raise up the chair and spot-check the fabric for straightness and for any protruding staples. Make adjustments, if necessary. When the fabric is in position, replace sub-staples with permanent staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 60

7/9/13 11:50 AM

page

61 louis chair

17. Center the piece of Dacron from step 10 over

18. Staple the piece of burlap over the Dacron.

19. Staple and stretch two vertical pieces of web-

Remember to staple on the unfinished wood and spot-check for staples that protrude through the back of the chair. Repeat step 16 to trim the burlap.

bing across the inside back (see steps 2–6 from chapter 3). Since the back does not hold much weight, we only need a few strips of webbing to reinforce the space.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 61

the fabric.

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

16. Trim off excess fabric just past the staples with a utility knife.

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

louis chair

62

20. Place two layers of cotton batting on the back. The first layer should be approximately 2" smaller on all sides than the frame, and the second layer should be 2" smaller on all sides than the first layer.

22. Repeat steps 14–16 to attach the inside back

21. Spray adhesive on the side of the foam without Dacron and center and stick it to the inside back. Spray the adhesive away from the chair so you don’t get glue on the frame or fabric.

Ta-dah!

fabric. See Pucker-Free Fabric on page 52 for tips on getting a smooth inside back.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 62

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Fabric Welt cord stick or yardstick White or yellow chalk Scissors Sewing machine Thread Double-welt cord foot attachment 5/32" fiber flex welt cord High-heat glue gun and glue Regulator

23. Measure the length of cording needed to cover all visible staples. Fabric strips for cording must be drawn on the bias, with a 45-degree angle being ideal. For double welt cord, draw straight lines across the fabric that are twice the width of the welt cord stick or 3" wide. The length of each piece may vary, but try to get the needed length in as few pieces as possible to prevent an abundance of seams. Continue drawing until you have the necessary length with several extra inches for finishing off the ends. To keep the nap and pattern oriented in the same direction for the entire length of the welt cord fabric, mark each strip at the end closest to the top of the fabric. Then cut out the pieces.

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

With the other furniture in the book, we use techniques to hide staples on the underside of the frame or behind outer layers of fabric. Furniture with decorative wood may require trim to cover exposed staples, giving the piece a clean and finished look. For the Louis chair, we’ll make double welt cord out of the fabric and use the hot glue gun to attach it over the staples. If you prefer more contrast, use a different fabric for the cording or a decorative trim such as gimp. Decorative nailhead is yet another option for covering staples and adding a touch of hardware and glimmer to your piece (see page 203).

louis chair

Making and Attaching Double Welt Cord

63

Make a Welt Cord Stick Instead of measuring the width of each piece of welt cord, make a welt cord stick to save time. A 11/2"-wide strip of fabric is the perfect width to wrap around small welt cord and leave a 1/2" seam allowance, so I had my local hardware store cut a 11/2"-wide × 48"-long strip of Masonite to make an inexpensive, lightweight, and durable welt cord stick. Don’t have a welt cord stick? Use a yardstick to measure and draw strips of cording on fabric.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 63

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

louis chair

64

A

B

24. On the way to the sewing machine, plug in the glue gun so it’s nice and hot when you’re ready for it. Lay an unmarked end next to a marked end and cut them at complementary 45-degree angles.

25. With good sides together, align the edges cut in step 24. Shift the fabric on top toward the fabric on bottom until points A and B are ½" below the aligned edges. This should form the shape of a teepee.

26. Stitch from point A to B to attach the ends of welt cord together. Repeat steps 24–26 until all strips of fabric are seamed end to end and there is one long piece of cording fabric.

27. Measure and cut two lengths of cord the same length as the fabric. Place the first cording in the middle of the fabric on the wrong side.

If you’re working with thick fabric, consider using spring twine in place of fiberflex cording to reduce bulk and increase flexibility in finished double welt.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 64

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

65 louis chair

29. Flip the cords to the right so the fabric envel-

meet. Place the second piece of cording on top of the fabric and next to the first piece of cording.

ops both.

30. Hold the double welt cord tightly together

31. When the double welt cord is sewn from

and place it under the double-welt cord foot with the grooves in the foot aligned with the cording inside the fabric. Lower the foot and stitch from one end of the fabric to the other. As you sew, stop and repeat steps 28 and 29 to adjust the cording and get it ready for feeding through the sewing machine. Also, lay seams open and flat to minimize bulk.

one end to the other, remove it from the sewing machine and trim off the fabric tail on the backside. Trim as closely as possible without cutting the double welt cord.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 65

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

28. Fold the fabric over the cording so the edges

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

louis chair

66

32. Since the ends of the double welt cord are

33. Place a bead of hot glue inside the fabric and

visible, fold under and hide the raw fabric at the beginning and end of every piece of welt cord. Open up the fabric on one end of the welt cord and cut out an inch of both pieces of cording.

fold the end back together to seal it shut.

34. To keep the corners of the excess fabric from

36. Apply glue to the first 4" of welt cord and stick it to the bottom of the inside back. The finished end should be lined up with the bottom middle of the inside back, and the cording should be covering the staples and adjacent to the finished edge of the wood. As you approach the corner, pre-bend the cording so it goes easily into place after the glue is applied. Continue applying glue and sticking the cording to the staple line.

showing when it’s folded under, snip them off to make a pointed end.

35. Put glue on the back of the excess fabric and fold it to the backside of the double welt cord to complete the finished end.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 66

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

67 louis chair

37. Inevitably, glue will squish out from under the

38. When you get back to where you started, repeat

cording. When this happens, use the regulator to squish it back into place.

steps 32–35 to finish off the cording so it meets the end we started with. Repeat steps 36 and 37 to apply double welt cord to all other exposed staples. Around the seat, start and stop at the leg posts. For the arm pads, begin and end the welt cord at the bottom middle of the inside of the arm.

Attaching Welt Cord with a Gimp Stapler When I found out that decorative trim is attached with hot glue, I thought, “This can’t be right. Hot glue is for Girl Scouts and elementary craft projects, not professional upholsterers.” But it is true, and over the course of many years and hundreds of projects, it has proven to be a clean, quick, and sturdy way to attach trim — as long as you use a high-heat gun instead of your run-of-the-mill craft or mini glue gun. If you’re still not buying it, or have a fear of burning your fingers, try using a gimp stapler. Gimp staplers shoot tiny staples that are relatively unnoticeable. For materials such as vinyl or leather, which will not stick with glue, gimp staplers are a good alternative. Hold the nose of the gun in the middle of the double welt and shoot the staple in between the two cords. For the cleanest look, use a measuring tape to regularly space the staples every 1"–2".

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 67

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

louis chair

68

Attaching the Dustcover Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Dustcover Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Cardboard tack strip White or yellow chalk Air blower

Blind Tacking Fabric Blind tacking is a clean and easy way to attach straight edges and hide staples. Although it’s most common to blind-tack outside arms and backs, we frequently blind-tack the front edges of dustcovers and the top edges of tack bands.

39. To attach the dustcover, flip your chair upside

40. Reinforce the first stapled edge by stapling a

down. Cut out a piece of dustcover large enough to cover the bottom of the chair, with a few extra inches for pulling and stapling. If the front edge of your chair is straight, center and staple the front edge of the dustcover to the front bottom of the chair. (Since the front of the Louis chair is curved, I attached the dustcover to the back of the chair first.) If all the edges of your piece are curved, see steps 21–23 (page 125) for dustcover instructions.

piece of cardboard tack strip over it. The tack strip should be lined up with the edge of the chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 68

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

69 louis chair

under the excess, and staple the middle. You just performed a blind tack by attaching the first side and folding the material over it to hide the staples. The dustcover should be taut and wrinkle-free, but be careful not to stretch it out of shape. Continue stapling the opposite side of the dustcover.

42. Perform release cuts at all four legs, fold under the excess dustcover, and staple the sides (see steps 5 and 6, page 43).

43. Attach the blower to the air hose and dust off the finished piece.

the finished chair!

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 69

Ch. 5: Upholstering Arm Pads, a Picture Back, and Finishing the Chair

41. Pull the dustcover toward the opposite side, fold

7/9/13 11:51 AM

Project 2

A New Pair of Slippers

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 70

7/9/13 11:51 AM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 71

7/9/13 11:51 AM

page

72

Chapter 6

Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern Symmetry is a design elementI can’t live without. It’s not necessary to split a room down the middle and mirror the right and left sides, but symmetry, in even the smallest way, can help ground and create order in an eclectic space. If you’re a collector of treasures and home furnishings, like I am, try introducing a pair of side tables, lamps, or chairs to bring order to your accumulation of artifacts.

The Design Plan I imagined holidays by the fire, and family and friends gathering in the living room, well before the house was complete, but entertaining requires seating, and plenty of it. With a variety of furniture already slated for the space, I came across this pair of slipper chairs. Admittedly, the fringe was a brief deterrent, but once I got over that, I realized they were the perfect balance of size and shape to complement the boxy shape of the sofa and ottoman. The height of the ceiling and fireplace won’t dwarf these substantial chairs, yet because they’re armless, they don’t overcrowd the room. And with two of them, I get my fix for symmetry.

slipper chair

Before

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 72

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

73 slipper chair

Slipper Chair Restyling

Rio in Black on White by Quadrille

Ch. 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern

The channels are comfortable and a nice break from the smooth, tight backs of the wingback and Louis chair, so we’ll keep the same styling on the inside back. More often than not, I’m removing skirts rather than keeping them, but the room is a little leggy and hard with exposed legs on every other piece and hardwood floors. A tailored, boxpleated skirt is a simple and modern solution for keeping the skirt without keeping the fringe. As for the rest of the fringe, we’ll replace it with self welt cord. The fabric on the slipper chairs makes a substantial contribution to the room. Since I don’t want them to be the center of attention, I’ve chosen this black-and-white dotted print by Quadrille to add a playful gesture without making a bold statement with pattern or color. Grouped with the sofa and cocktail ottoman, the medium-sized pattern contrasts nicely with the solid tones of the green and orange. The linen-cotton blend fabric lightens the heaviness of the leather and velvet, and achieves the crisp edges that are so important to a box-pleated skirt. remove fringe; replace with self welt

remove fringe skirt; replace with box-pleated skirt

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 73

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

from the spruce archives

design inspiration

74

Whether large or small, centering and aligning a fabric pattern gives it focus and helps the eye move properly around the piece.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 74

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

75

design inspiration

To prevent visual overload, choose a solid fabric for pieces with elaborate styling details.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 75

from the spruce archives

Contrasting piping adds definition to the lines of this chair.

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

slipper chair

76

Parts of the Slipper Chair back scroll panel

back scroll panel

Ch. 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern

inside back outside back seat boxing tack band back skirt flap

front skirt flap side skirt flap

1. Write down each piece of the chair to help remember what needs to be measured: • Seat • Inside back (ISB) • Outside back (OSB) • Back scroll panels

• • • •

Front skirt flap Side skirt flaps Back skirt flap Boxing/tack band

3. The depth of the seat is measured from the inside back to the front seam (22").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 76

2. To get an accurate yardage estimate, always measure largest dimensions of the fabric. With a boxed seat, measure from seam to seam across the width of the chair (34").

4. Measure from the left to the right side at the widest part of the inside back to determine the width (30").

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

77 slipper chair

6. Measure from the left to the right side at the

and stretch the measuring tape all the way around the roll to the connection between the inside and outside back (28").

widest part of the outside back to determine the width (29").

7. Start just under the roll at the top of the outside

8. On the back scroll panels, the fabric pattern

back and measure to the bottom edge of the chair frame for the height (25").

should be parallel to the floor, so hold the measuring tape level and measure from the back edge of the back scroll to the point where the front of the panel meets the seat (6").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 77

Ch. 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern

5. When measuring the height, start at the seat

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

Ch. 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern

slipper chair

78

9. Hold the measuring tape perpendicular to the floor and measure the height from the seat to the top of the back scroll (17").

10. The skirt will split at each leg, creating four

11. Measure the distance between the front and

12. The distance between the back two legs is the

back legs on one side for the width of the side skirt flaps (19½").

width of the back skirt flap (23").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 78

panels. Measure the distance between the front legs to get the width of the front skirt flap (31").

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

79 slipper chair

15. Measure across the boxing and tack band from the top seam to the bottom of the seat frame (11½"). Later, we’ll determine how to divide this space between the boxing and tack band.

16. The numbers in the columns to the right of 14. For the width of the seat boxing, double the measurement from step 11 (39") and add it to the measurement from step 10 (70").

width and height are added to the measurements from steps 2–15 for pulling, stapling, and ½" seam allowances. We’ll use the final numbers for calculating yardage.

Ch. 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern

13. Measure from the top to the bottom of the skirt to determine its height (6"). Sometimes, skirts are shorter in the back depending on the slant of the chair and frame. If there’s a noticeable difference between the height of the back and front flaps, record the tallest height.

Measurements of the Slipper Chair Fabric Piece

Width

Allowance

Final Width

Height/ Depth

Allowance

Final Height/ Depth

Seat

34"

2"

36"

22"

6"

28"

ISB

30"

24"

54"

28"

6"

34"

OSB

29"

3"

32"

25"

3"

28"

Back scroll panel

6"

2"

8"

17"

2"

19"

Front skirt flap

31"

3"

34"

6"

2"

8"

Side skirt flap

19½"

3"

22½"

6"

2"

8"

Back skirt flap

23"

3"

26"

6"

2"

8"

Boxing/tack band

70"

3"

73"

11½"

3"

14½"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 79

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

Ch. 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern

slipper chair

80

Calculating Allowance for Channels You may notice thatthe ISB has a large amount of allowance added to the original measurement. Every time the fabric dips into the chair, we need extra fabric. The channels on the slipper chair dip 1½" into the chair, so I added 4" per dip: 1½" of fabric going in, 1½" coming out, and 1" of seam allowance for sewing the channels together. We have 5 dips between the 6 channels, which equal 20" of allowance. We also need fabric for pulling and stapling on the right and left sides, so we’ll add 24" of fabric to our original width so the fabric will reach across the inside back. Although the fabric is an abstract, allover pattern, there are faint vertical lines that we’ll line up horizontally across the chair. We’ll center the seat, ISB, OSB, front, and back skirt panels on the fabric and place the side skirt flaps and back scroll panels side by side. Since the dots are so small and have no dominant design, we won’t pattern-match vertically from piece to piece.

17. Add the final heights/depths of all pieces together. For the side skirt flaps and back scroll panels, add in only one height since the two pieces for each will be drawn next to each other across one width of fabric. When a piece is wider than the width of the fabric (48" in this case), double the number (28" + 68" + 28" + 19" + 8" + 8" + 8" + 29" = 196").

18. Divide the total number by 36" to calculate the number of yards (5.44).

19. I always round up to the nearest yard and give myself an additional yard for variances, welt cord, and error (7). For both slipper chairs, we’ll need 14 yards of fabric.

Fabric Fact Did you know that 1 yard of fabric makes approximately 1,000" of single-welt cord? That may seem like a lot of inches, but even a piece with small amounts of welt cord, like this slipper chair, requires nearly 400".

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 80

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

81

Supplies for the Slipper Chair

Basic supplies

1/2" staples 3/8" staples 5/32" or 1/4" staples 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Button twine Painter’s or masking tape Panel nails Paper Pencil Permanent marker Spray adhesive Spring twine Staples (optional) Thread T-pins Water-soluble fabric marker (optional) White or yellow chalk

Tools & equipment

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Air blower Button machine Button needle Channel stuffer Electric carving knife Goggles Hand-stapling plier (optional) Inexpensive scissors Iron Magnetic tack hammer Measuring tape Pliers Regulator Rubber mallet Ruler Scissors Sewing machine

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 81

Single-welt cord foot Small wooden dowel or pen Square Square-point upholstery knife Staple gun Staple remover Two-piece dies and fabric cutter for the desired button size • Webbing stretcher • Welt cord stick (optional) • Yardstick Materials

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

9 yards 5/32" fiber flex welt cord 14 yards fabric 2 yards burlap Button fronts and loop backs 4 yards cardboard tack strip 7 yards cotton batting 2 yards 27"-wide Dacron 3 yards decking material or scrap fabric 1 yard dustcover 2 yards edge roll 1/2 slab 2"–3"-thick high-density foam 9 yards jute webbing Panelboard 2 yards Pli-Grip 3 yards skirt stiffener Small piece of cardboard White scrap fabric

Ch. 6: Determining Yardage for a Small Pattern

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • •

slipper chair

OVERVIEW

For more information on tools and materials, visit the glossary (page 369).

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

82

Chapter 7

Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat Sinuous, or zigzag,springs are commonly found in modern furniture, and although coil springs are preferable, sinuous springs do provide additional support and are long-lasting in seats and backs. Because sinuous springs are made of steel formed into continuous S-shaped lengths, we only need to tie the springs laterally to secure them. When stripping a piece with sinuous springs, leave the springs attached to the frame (see Stripping Furniture, page 353). Inspect the spring clips and hammer down or reinforce any ends that appear to be loose or insecure. If a spring has become detached from the chair, reattach a spring clip in the same area, stretch the spring back into place, and hammer the clip tightly around the end of the spring. Add a few upholstery tacks to the spring clip for added security. For coil-sprung seats, see chapter 3 and skip to step 10. For seats without springs, attach webbing to the top of the frame and, again, skip to step 10.

slipper chair

Stripped to the frame

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 82

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

83

Supplies

1. We’ll tie across the sinuous springs in two rows. Hammer in halfway two pairs of tacks on the right and left sides of the frame. Evenly space the pairs from the front to the back of the chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 83

Goggles Magnetic tack hammer 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Spring twine Scissors 1/2" staples Staple gun

2. When the tacks are in place, stretch doubledover spring twine across the springs. Cut the doubled twine 10" longer than the width of the seat.

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

• • • • • • •

slipper chair

Tying Sinuous Springs

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

slipper chair

84

3. Take the middle of the doubled-over twine and

4. Pull the left strand of twine from the front pair

place it in between a pair of tacks. Make a loop around each tack and pull tight. Hammer down the tacks all the way to secure the twine in place. Repeat this step for the other pair of tacks on the same side of the chair.

of tacks under the closest curve in the spring and make a loose knot around it. Just as we did with the Louis chair, position the spring so it’s leaning slightly toward the tacks, then tighten the knot (steps 25–27, pages 36–37).

5. On the next sinuous spring, find the curve directly across from the last knot and move one curve closer toward the back of the chair. Repeat step 4 to tie a knot around the curve. For the next springs, continue tying to the curve directly across from the previous knot. When you reach the last sinuous spring, tie the knot around the curve one step closer to the front of the chair.

As you secure the springs in place, attempt to create a slight dome with the profile of the springs. The middle spring(s) should be parallel to the floor, with the springs to the right and left tilting slightly toward the right and left sides, respectively.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 84

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

85 slipper chair

8. When both strands are tied, staple the ends of the twine to the frame and trim off the excess.

9. Repeat steps 4–8 to tie the back row. When the 7. Repeat steps 4–6 to tie the springs with the right strand of twine. Instead of skipping to the curve toward the back of the chair, move the opposite direction and tie to the curve one step closer to the front of the chair. On the last sinuous spring, skip to the curve closer to the back.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 85

springs are tied, they should be stable and resist movement from side to side.

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

6. Wrap the left strand of twine around the left tack. Pull the twine tightly, cinching down the springs, and hammer the tack to keep the twine in place.

7/9/13 11:52 AM

page

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

slipper chair

86

Attach Burlap and Webbing to the Seat Supplies • • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Burlap Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Jute webbing Webbing stretcher

10. Just as we did with the Louis chair, cut a piece of burlap large enough to cover the seat with a few extra inches for pulling and stapling on all sides. Center the burlap and staple the middle of the front, back, and sides. Perform release cuts so the burlap lies flat around the back leg posts of the chair (Release Cuts 101, page 44).

12. Attach webbing and burlap around the edge

11. Staple the burlap tightly around the perimeter of the seat, fold back the excess, and staple again.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 86

of the seat to create a solid plane for padding and fabric. Attach the end of the webbing above the hole and leverage the webbing stretcher against the frame to stretch the webbing tightly toward the bottom of the chair. Staple the webbing below the  open space, cut off the excess 1" past the ­staples, fold back, and staple again. Continue attaching webbing over the spaces with 2"–3" between strips.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

87

Supplies • • • • • • • •

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

Attaching Edge Roll and Cutting the Foam

slipper chair

13. To keep the padding from squishing through the frame between the strips of webbing, staple burlap over the holes to create a solid plane around the front and sides of the seat.

3/4" edge roll Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples Permanent marker Square-point upholstery knife High-density foam (2"–3" thick) Electric carving knife

14. Staple ¾" edge roll to the front edge of the seat to protect the padding from excessive wear and tear. Begin the edge roll ½" from the side of the back. Line it up with the front edge of the frame and staple through the tail to hold it in place.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 87

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

slipper chair

88

15. Continue stapling around the seat. When you are 6" from the other side, draw a line in permanent marker ½" from the side of the back. Use the square-point upholstery knife to cut off the excess and staple down the end.

16. Pinch off and staple the front of the edge roll

17. Place a piece of foam on top of the seat and squish it under the bar at the back. With the permanent marker, draw lines to indicate where the back leg posts intersect the padding.

18. Press down the foam on the front of the chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 88

to the frame. These staples will prevent it from rocking back and forth as the sitter moves across the seat.

and trace the edge of the seat on the underside of the foam.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

89 slipper chair

20. Place the foam on the seat to check the fit.

shape. To ensure the padding covers the edge of the seat and fills out the boxed seat fabric, cut just beyond the line.

Make adjustments to the cuts so the foam fits snugly around the posts and extends just past the edges of the seat.

Cutting Out the Fabric for the Top of the Seat Supplies • • • • •

Fabric White or yellow chalk Air blower Foam cut to size Scissors

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

19. Use the carving knife to cut out the traced

21. It may seem out of order to cut out fabric for the seat, but it’s easier to use the foam as a pattern before it’s attached to the chair. Do a chalk test (see glossary) with the air blower to determine which color chalk comes out of the fabric the easiest. Place the foam on the fabric with the bottom side down and trace ½" beyond the edge. As you trace, be sure the pattern is centered and straight on the seat.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 89

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

slipper chair

90 Flap for pulling through and stapling under

Foam

22. Toward the back of the foam, you cut out two notches to go around the back posts. Trace the foam on the fabric as if the notches were not cut out, but make small marks to indicate where the notches begin. At the middle of the notches, draw 6" lines straight back. Connect the ends of these lines with one straight line across the back of the seat. This extra flap is for pulling through and stapling under the inside back.

Finishing the Padding on the Seat Since we have edge roll on the seat, w  e’ll attach the foam to the chair with fabric pulls. Although we typically use scrap burlap, I prefer to use white pulls with white or lightcolored fabric so it doesn’t show through on the finished chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 90

Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Scissors White scrap fabric for pulls Spray adhesive Foam cut to size of the seat Cotton batting Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Dacron

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

91 slipper chair

24. While we’re waiting for the glue to dry, fill in

foam, avoiding the notches you cut out for the back posts. The pulls should be tall enough to reach over the foam and edge roll and staple to the wood below the top of the seat (about 6"). For the pull along the back edge, make it long enough to reach under the inside back and staple to the wood behind the seat. Allow the pulls to dry for 10 minutes before attaching the foam to the chair (steps 16 and 17, page 48).

the top of the seat with two layers of cotton batting. Tuck the edges of the cotton behind the edge roll to fill in the dip. Add another layer around the perimeter of the seat if there’s still a dip behind the edge roll.

25. Center the foam on the seat and staple the pull to the center back of the seat. When the pull is stapled, the top edge of the foam should be slightly rounded but still boxy.

26. Pull the foam toward the front of the chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 91

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

23. Cut out and glue pulls to the edges of the

with the front edge extending slightly beyond the edge roll and staple the pull to the front middle of the chair.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

slipper chair

92

27. Continue stapling the pulls around the sides of the seat until the foam is attached all the way around. Cut off the excess fabric just past the staples.

28. Cut out a piece of Dacron large enough to

29. Make cuts in the Dacron to release it around

30. Cut out another piece of Dacron long and tall enough to cover the sides of the seat. Use spray adhesive to attach it all the way around, stopping where the sides of the seat meet the outside back.

the sides of the back posts, then push the Dacron under the bar at the back of the seat. Trim off the excess Dacron even with the edge of the foam.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 92

cover the top of the seat and use spray adhesive to attach it.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

93 slipper chair

32. Spray a small amount of adhesive on the Dacron edges at the top edge of the seat and press them together. This will keep the Dacron in place as you pull the fabric over the seat.

33. Trim off the excess Dacron 1" above the bottom edge of the chair to leave room for the skirt to attach later.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 93

Ch. 7: Prepping Sinuous Springs and Padding a Tight, Boxed Seat

31. Split the layers of Dacron in half and staple the bottom layer near the bottom edge of the seat. The top layer will cover the indentations made by the staples.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

94

Chapter 8

Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat White fabric is one of the mostchallenging materials to work with. Besides the obvious issue of keeping it clean, we also have to worry about things showing through it. In the last chapter, we used white fabric instead of burlap to make pulls around the edges of the seat. Although the ­density of foam I chose comes in white, it’s best to avoid colored foam such as pink, blue, green, or yellow so it doesn’t tint the fabric. If you must use colored foam, cover it with two layers of Dacron to minimize the visibility of the color. As we begin attaching fabric to the chair, keep these other tips in mind: »» Avoid using permanent marker on the topside of padding when tracing shapes or making cuts. If marking on the topside is necessary, snip off the marks with scissors before attaching fabric. »» Use yellow chalk sparingly, as it tends to discolor white fabric. »» Check for strings, stray threads, and lint before stapling fabric. Even the smallest spec of dirt can show through white fabrics. »» Wear disposable latex gloves to prevent oils from your hands from getting on the fabric. »» Consider having fabric Teflon-treated for soil and stain resistance. It will substantially extend the life of a crisp, white upholstery job.

dry cleaning pad in action

»» Introduced to me by my fellow Sprucette, Clar, this dry cleaning pad is a lifesaver! When you accidentally get dirt on your fabric, gently sweep the bag across the soiled area to magically erase the problem.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 94

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Supplies Measuring tape Pencil Paper Fabric Square

• • • •

White or yellow chalk Yardstick Scissors Welt cord stick (optional)

1. In the last chapter, we used the foam to trace the top piece of fabric for the seat, but we still need fabric for the boxing and tack band. Before we can determine the height of these pieces, we need to determine the height of the skirt. The skirt will attach 1" above the bottom edge of the chair. The distance from the floor to this point is 5½". However, we need at least ¼" of clearance below the skirt so it doesn’t touch the floor, which means the finished height of the skirt is 5¼".

Ch. 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat

• • • • •

slipper chair

Cutting Out the Rest of the seat Fabric

95

5½"

boxing 5¼" tack band 5¼" skirt 5¼"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 95

2. In chapter 6, step 15, we measured the total height of the boxing and tack band together (11½"), but we already know the skirt attaches 1" above the bottom of the chair, which makes the visible height of the boxing and tack band 10½". If we split this between the two pieces, the visible height of each piece is 5¼". When you replace padding, always cross-check your original measurements with the new ones to determine if there are variances.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

96

Ch. 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat

slipper chair

32" Middle boxing 21" Left boxing

61⁄4" 21"

61⁄4"

Right boxing

61⁄4"

32" Middle tack band 21" Left tack band

73⁄4"

21" 73⁄4"

3. We’ll seam multiple pieces together to make the width we need for the boxing and tack band, since they are wider than the width of the fabric. In chapter 6, we decided that the skirt would split at all four legs, so we’ll align the seams in the boxing and tack band with the splits in the skirt. The middle piece will be 31" wide plus ½" on either end for seam allowances (32").

4. From the measurements in chapter 6, we know that the width of the boxing and tack band is 70" (see chapter 6, step 14). If we subtract the width of the middle piece (31"), we get 39". Divide this number by 2 and add 1½" for seam allowance, pulling, and stapling (21"). This will be the width of each side piece.

Right tack band

73⁄4"

5. Using a square and yardstick, draw the middle piece and two side pieces of boxing on the fabric. With 1" of seam allowances, the boxing pieces will be 6¼" tall. When you draw the right and left sides, leave at least 1" of extra fabric on either side. In order to match the pattern from the boxing and tack band to the skirt, we’ll need this extra fabric since the overall width of the skirt is wider than that of the boxing and tack band.

6. Now draw three pieces for the tack band. Add ½" of seam allowance for sewing it to the boxing and 2" for pulling and stapling it to the bottom, so the overall tack band height will be 7¾".

7. Multiply the width of the boxing (70") by 2 and add 10" to determine the length of welt cord we need for the seat (150"). Follow the instructions in Sewing Tips and Tricks (page 364) to draw the welt cord strips and cut out all the fabric pieces.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 96

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Supplies Fabric pieces cut to size Sewing machine Thread Single-welt cord foot T-pins or hand-stapling plier and staples Scissors 5/32" fiber flex welt cord

8. With good sides facing and edges aligned, stitch the right and left sides to the middle boxing piece. Repeat for the tack band fabric.

Ch. 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat

• • • • • • •

slipper chair

Sewing the Seat Together

97

9. Follow the instructions in Sewing Tips and Tricks (page 364) to stitch the single welt cord, then stitch the welt cord to the fabric for the top of the seat. Start the cording at the corner, where the pull-through flap meets the curve on the right side of the seat (see illustration, page 90). Line up the seam allowance edge of the welt cord with the edge of the fabric and place the cord under the welt cord foot. Stitch all the way around the seat fabric to the corner on the left side. If you’re stitching around a sharp curve or corner, make release cuts in the tail of the cording to help it bend around the curved edge.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 97

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Ch. 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat

slipper chair

98

10. To prevent puckering in the seams, use the hand-stapling plier or T-pins to keep the fabrics together as you sew (see page 360). With the boxing facedown and the top edge lined up with the seam allowance edge of the welt cord, stitch from the front middle to the left corner. Go back to the middle, flip over the fabric, and stitch to the right corner. If you’re working around a sharp curve or corner, make small release cuts in the seam allowance of the boxing so the fabric lies flat.

If your seat only has boxing or a tack band that can staple to the frame, skip to step 13. See pages 258–261 for attaching a tack band with staples. 11. With its seam allowance edge lined up with the bottom edge of the boxing, attach welt cord to the bottom of the boxing.

Pattern-Matching on a Curve

12. Repeat step 10 to attach the tack band to the bottom of the boxing. Inspect all seams to make sure the sewing is tight and no threads are showing. Tighten problem areas by stitching over the seams again. Remove any staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 98

The vertical lines in the pattern should be matched from the boxing to the tack band all the way around the chair. You may notice that the boxing matches the top of the seat at the front middle, but gets out of line as it attaches around the sides. When you sew a curved shape, pattern-matching is only possible at one point, so do your best to match the middle or most noticeable part of the curve.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Supplies Sewn fabric for the seat Ruler Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Chalk Scissors Pliers Staple remover

13. Center the fabric on the seat and pull through the back middle. Attach the fabric to the wood behind the seat with sub-staples (see SubStapling, page 53).

14. Use the ruler to find the center between the

15. Work from the middle out and around the

front two legs, and mark the frame with chalk. Line up the center of the tack band with the chalk mark. Pull the fabric tightly while measuring the distance between the bottom edge of the chair and welt cord. When the distance measures 6¼", substaple the tack band to the bottom of the chair.

sides. Pull the fabric down and to the side to get the smoothest surface. As you staple, reach behind the fabric and pull the seam allowances down behind the boxing to keep the cording straight around the curve.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 99

Ch. 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat

• • • • • • • • •

slipper chair

Attaching the Fabric to the Seat

99

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

Ch. 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat

slipper chair

100

16. When you reach the front legs, make release

17. After you’ve sub-stapled the fabric around the

cuts so the fabric will lie flat on either side. By cutting from the outside into the side of the leg at a diagonal, also known as a straight cut, you create a flap that has wings. When you tuck the flap up into the tack band, the wings keep the fabric from slipping out.

front of the seat, make a cut to release the fabric around the sides of the right back post (see page 44).

18. We’ll make a second release cut to wrap the fabric around to the outside back of the chair.

19. Before you can pull the fabric tight to the

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 100

back, open up the welt cord and remove the cording even with the edge of the outside back. Pull the fabric tight and sub-staple to the outside back. Continue stapling down the side until you reach the welt cord between the boxing and tack band. Remove the excess cording and continue stapling until you reach the bottom.

7/9/13 11:53 AM

page

101 slipper chair

21. Repeat steps 17–20 for the left side of the chair, then sub-staple the rest of the fabric on the backside of the seat.

slipper chair

22. When the fabric is smooth and sub-stapled on all sides, use the pliers and staple remover to remove subs and replace them with permanent staples. Trim off the excess fabric to complete the seat.

Ch. 8: Sewing and Attaching Fabric to a Boxed Seat

20. Make a release cut at the back leg so the fabric folds under in front of the leg and staples to the bottom of the chair.

Seat and tack band complete

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 101

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

102

Chapter 9

Upholstering a Channel Back You’re more likely to find a channel-back chair at Grandma’s house than you are in a department store. Because it’s more labor-intensive than a smooth inside back, it’s uncommon to find furniture with this construction in modern upholstery, but if you’ve ever sat in one, you know that channels provide a firm yet comfortable support that’s unmatched by any other tight back construction. Channels were originally used as a method for holding loose padding in place, by creating smaller chambers where materials such as cotton, horsehair, or hay could not shift around and get lumpy. To create these channels, we’ll sew two layers of fabric together, then stuff the padding in between to pad the back.

Preparing the Inside Back for Channels Supplies • • • • • • • • • • •

Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Measuring tape Burlap Cotton batting Panelboard White or yellow chalk

1. To reinforce the open space in the inside back, staple webbing to the wooden bar just above the seat. With the webbing stretcher, tighten the webbing across the inside back and staple it to the bar at the top (see page 29 for stretching and stapling webbing).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 102

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

103 slipper chair

3. Measure the width and height of the inside

through the vertical strips, as we did with the seat of the Louis chair, stretch the horizontal behind the vertical ones so that the surface for the padding follows the curve of the frame.

back and cut out a piece of burlap large enough to cover its surface and around the roll at the top. Add a few extra inches on all sides for pulling and stapling. Staple the burlap to the wooden bars at the bottom, top, and sides of the inside back. Leave the extra burlap for the roll unstapled.

4. Place layers of cotton on top of the inside back to fill in the shape of the roll. When compressed, the cotton should keep its shape, not flatten out. When you’ve padded 4"–6" of the roll, staple the burlap over it to keep the padding in place as you continue stuffing.

5. When the roll is filled all the way across and the burlap is stapled around it, fold back the excess burlap on all sides of the inside back and staple it again.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 103

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

2. Instead of weaving the horizontal strips

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

slipper chair

104

We’ll trace the sides of the inside back before we add padding and use these shapes later to make the back scroll panels. Sometimes we’re able to use wooden or cardboard panels from the previous upholstery job, but the ones from the old chair were damaged during stripping. We’ll making new ones out of panelboard, a really dense cardboard used in upholstery, and attach them at the very end.

6. Press a piece of panelboard against the side of the inside back and flush to the seat. Use chalk to trace the shape of the frame and set it aside for later use.

Cutting the Fabric for the Inside Back When I stripped the slipper chair,I kept the inside back as a reference for making the channels. You can use the old pattern to trace the new channels, but it’s best to take measurements and make your own pattern that fits the rejuvenated chair perfectly.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 104

Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Pencil Paper Fabric Square Yardstick White or yellow chalk Decking material or scrap fabric Scissors

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

extra for pulling and stapling

105 3" 5"

33"

visible fabric

28"

5"

the inside back (33") and the skinniest dimension at the bottom next to the seat (21"). Measure the height of the inside back from the seat to the underside of the roll (28"). We’ll need an extra 5" at the top and bottom and 3" on each side for pulling and stapling. If you’re working with a limited amount or an expensive fabric, you can sew a piece of scrap fabric to the bottom of the inside back for pulling and stapling; just be sure it doesn’t show.

1½"

3"

8. If I divide the width of the inside back by 6 channels, I get a channel width of 5½" at the top and 3½" at the bottom, but we need to add extra fabric to go into the dips between the channels. The inside back fabric is sewn to another layer of fabric, which creates the back of the channels. When the channels are stuffed, they expand toward the back and front to create individual cylinders of padding. My goal is to make the padding 3" thick, which means I need to add 1½" to both sides of each channel to dip in to the center of the cylinder.

5" 12"

9½"

9½"

9½"

9½"

12"

D

E

F

7½"

7½"

10"

62" A

B

10"

7½"

C

7½"

28" 38"

5"

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

21"

7. Measure the widest dimension at the top of

slipper chair

3"

9. Before we determine our final dimensions for the fabric, we need to add 1" to the inside channels and ½" to the right and left channels for seam allowances. I’ve also added 3" to the right and left channels for pulling and stapling. It’s important that the extra fabric at the top and bottom extends beyond the measurements we’ve calculated for the top and bottom of the channels, since the fabric will get wider and skinnier beyond these points.

50"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 105

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

slipper chair

106

C

B

D

E

10. Use a square and a yardstick to draw the channels on the fabric. So the pattern at the center of the seat matches the center of the channels, use the center axis of the pattern for the interior edges of channels C and D. Draw the rest of the channels so the pattern is square to the central axis of each channel. Cut them all out.

A

F

57"

11. Cut a piece of decking material (or scrap fabric Decking material or scrap fabric

38"

if you have a piece big enough) for the back of the channels. The piece should be the same size as the overall dimensions of the front fabric, minus seam allowances.

45"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 106

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

Supplies Fabric pieces cut to size Sewing machine Thread T-pins or hand-stapling plier and staples Scissors Channel stuffer Cotton batting Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples White or yellow chalk Regulator Pliers Staple remover

13. If you are conserving fabric by attaching an extra piece of fabric to the bottom for pulling and stapling, stitch it to the bottom. If not, skip to step 14.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 107

12. With good sides facing and cut edges aligned, stitch the channels together side by side.

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

slipper chair

Sewing and Attaching the Channel Back

107

14. When the channels are sewn together, press the seam allowances open and flat on the backside of the fabric. Pin or staple the decking or scrap material to the back of the fabric and stitch over the seams between the channels to connect the front fabric to the decking material. The right and left channels should be left open on the outside edges.

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

slipper chair

108

15. Fill the bottom half of the channel stuffer with loose cotton batting. A channel stuffer is a two-part metal chamber that holds loose cotton so it can be easily compacted and inserted into tight pockets. They come in a variety of sizes and are essential in making smooth and lump-free channels.

16. Place the top half of the channel stuffer over the loose cotton and use your hand to push the cotton to the smaller end. Hold the stuffer together with your dominant hand while you insert more cotton with your nondominant hand.

17. With the cotton packed tightly in the stuffer, hold the stuffer together while you insert it all the way into the middle channel.

18. While holding the cotton in the channel, pull out the metal sleeves one at a time.

19. Working from the center out, repeat steps 15–18 until all but the right and left channels are stuffed with cotton. Check the firmness of each channel and add or remove cotton so they all match.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 108

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

109 slipper chair

21. To keep the channels evenly spaced, mark the frame with chalk at the top and bottom in six even spaces to denote the edges of each channel. Use these marks to guide you as you staple. Work from the middle out, adjusting cotton, smoothing the fabric, and stapling the channels in place. Taper out the padding as it approaches the connection between the inside and outside back.

22. For the right channel, start by stapling the

23. Fill the right channel with cotton and sub-

back layer of fabric to the frame.

staple the fabric to the side of the back. The cotton should just cover the wooden corner on the right side of the channel.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 109

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

20. Center the channels on the inside back and sub-staple the top and bottom middles. As you attach the channels to the chair, it may be necessary to remove or add cotton from or to the top or bottom of the channels so the back is padded only from the seat to the underside of the roll. When I attached the channels to the inside back, I removed some of the cotton to make the back softer.

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

slipper chair

110

24. At the bottom of the channel, perform a cut to release the fabric around the sides of the right post (see page 44). Remove sub-staples and replace with permanent staples when the fabric is in place.

25. Repeat steps 23 and 24 for the left channel.

26. As the fabric wraps around the roll at the top of the back, use the regulator to make pleats and evenly disburse excess fabric around the curve. Pleats should fold under toward the floor, so dirt and crumbs don’t get lodged in the folded fabric. If you have a pleat that is perpendicular to the floor, fold the fabric under toward the back or outside of the chair.

27. When channels and pleats are in place, remove sub-staples and replace with permanent ones.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 110

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

28. Fold a piece of fabric back and forth until it makes several layers, then place the fabric between a piece of cardboard and the fabric cutter. Place the cutter, fabric, and cardboard in the button machine on top of the wax cylinder. Compress the handle of the machine until the cutter goes through all the layers of fabric. Repeat until you have enough circles to make the number of buttons you need.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 111

Supplies • Fabric • Two-piece dies and fabric cutter for the desired button size • Small piece of cardboard • Button machine with wax cylinder • Small wooden dowel or pen • Button fronts and loop backs • Measuring tape • T-pins • Button twine • Button needle • Cotton batting • Scissors

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

The last step to the channel back is ­placing one button between each channel. Although the button is primarily a decorative touch, it also helps keep the channels tight against the frame. If you don’t have a button machine, feel free to skip the buttons or use a button kit from your local sewing store. Just keep in mind that the buttons made with the kit are not as heavy-duty and may come apart over time.

slipper chair

Making and Attaching Buttons to the Inside Back

111

29. Remove the wax cylinder, fabric, and cutter from the button machine and place the bottom ­button die (the one that looks like a spring) in the hole at the bottom of the machine. Place the loop back (loop down) in the die.

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

slipper chair

112

30. Take a fabric circle and lay it facedown over the hole in the top die. Place the front of the button facedown on top of the fabric and use a wooden dowel or pen to push the button front and fabric into the hole of the die. Make sure the fabric and button front are centered over the die before pushing them into the hole, or the fabric will not cover all edges of the button.

31. Turn the top die upside down and hold up the

32. Compress the handle of the button machine several times while rotating the dies.

33. Separate the dies and remove the completed

bottom to keep it from pushing out the fabric and the front of the button. Place the top die on top of the bottom die and line them up so they lock in place.

button. Try twisting the loop on the back of the button. If it turns, the button is too loose and will likely come apart. Also check the edges of the button to make sure no raw edges are coming out. If you observe either of these issues, make a new button.

34. Repeat steps 29–33 until all buttons are made.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 112

7/9/13 11:54 AM

Button, button, who’s got the button?

page

113

Sizes: Buttons come in a variety of sizes, from

small like these (#22) to large (#60). Or make supersized buttons by cutting out a round piece of wood and upholstering it. Back options: With a variety of back options,

such as prongs, nails, loops, and snap rings, you can place a button anywhere. Prongs are good for attaching buttons to thin panels of wood or cardboard, while nail backs allow you to hammer buttons into wood. Loops are used for pulling buttons through thick layers of padding with button twine, and snap rings allow buttons to snap onto the heads of screws and snaps.

loop

snap ring nail

prong

Troubleshooting Having trouble getting a tight button? You may need to double or triple your layers of fabric to get the back to stay in place. On the other hand, thick fabrics such as leather may need a good hammering to flatten them out before placing them in the dies. If you’re still having a hard time squeezing in the fabric, use a little silicone spray to make the inside of the dies slick and friction-free.

35. Use the measuring tape to place T-pins in between the channels where the buttons will go. When you have a pin in the middle of every channel, step back and visually inspect the placement. Even though the measuring tape may accurately place the buttons, variations in padding can make buttons look uneven. Make adjustments to the height of the T-pins until they’re in the desired location.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 113

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

slipper chair

114

36. Cut a length of button twine approximately 24" long and string it through the loop on the back of the button. Meet the ends of the button twine and pull both through the eye of the button needle.

37. Insert the button needle through the inside back in place of a T-pin and pull the ends of twine all the way through.

Design Ideas Use a different fabric or an asymmetrical placement of buttons to add an unexpected twist to a piece of furniture. And here’s my favorite thing — use your upholstery tools in your closet. Replace those dull buttons on your winter jacket with large buttons covered in fabric you love!

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 114

7/9/13 11:54 AM

page

115 slipper chair

Making a Slipknot

39. Bring the right strand around and over the left strand and itself.

40. Pull the right strand behind itself, through

41. Place a piece of cotton batting in the loop and tighten the slipknot by pulling tightly on the left strand. Watch the button as you pull the twine and stop when you reach the desired tightness.

the loose knot, and tighten.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 115

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

38. We’ll make a slipknot to tighten the buttons in place. Slide both ends of the button twine back and forth to make sure the twine moves freely, and then place the right strand under the left strand.

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

slipper chair

116

42. Repeat steps 36–41

Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

until all buttons are in place and to the same tightness. Tie two knots in the twine to lock the slipknot in place and cut off the excess twine.

slipper chair

Seat and channel back complete

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 116

7/9/13 11:55 AM

Adding Buttons to a Finished Piece

slipper chair Ch. 9: Upholstering a Channel Back

What if you’ve finished your piece of furniture, and upon final inspection, you notice you forgot to attach the buttons? Oh no! Allow me to introduce the spring-loaded tufting needle. This needle projects a tab through the padding so you can attach and tighten a button from the front face of the fabric.

1. After your buttons are made, cut a piece of button twine approximately 24" long and string one end through the loop in the tab. 2. Place the tab in the chamber near the sharp end of the needle.

page

117

3. While firmly pulling the ends of the button twine, stick the needle through the padding at the desired button location and push the spring-loaded end to project the tab. Be careful not to stick the needle through the outside back.

4. Remove the needle and place the end of one strand of button twine through the loop on the back of the button. Tie a slipknot in the twine and tighten the button to the desired depth (see steps 38–42). Lock the button in place with two knots and cut the excess twine behind the buttons so the ends are hidden.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 117

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

118

Chapter 10

Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair The outside back is easy to complete,but requires attention to every detail. This is the last opportunity to conceal staples and messy areas. After the last few threads, staples, and raw edges are tucked away, we’ll cover the bottom with a dustcover and move on to the skirt and back scroll panels to complete the finishing touches.

Upholstering the Outside Back Supplies • • • • • • • • • • •

Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Measuring tape Burlap Sewn welt cord Pli-Grip 1/2" staples

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 118

• • • • • • • • • • •

Inexpensive scissors Painter’s or masking tape Dacron Fabric Square White or yellow chalk Yardstick Regulator Rubber mallet Pliers Staple remover

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

119 slipper chair

and staple webbing across the outside back. Because the outside back doesn’t get a lot of pressure and we have a wooden brace down the middle, we only need a few horizontal strips to reinforce the space and shape the curve of the outside back.

staple end of welt cord here

welt cord

2. Measure the width and height of the outside back and cut a piece of burlap a few inches bigger than these dimensions. We would normally staple the burlap across the top of the outside back, but since the space for stapling is limited, we’ll leave the burlap unstapled so we can attach the welt cord, Pli-Grip, and fabric. Stretch and staple the burlap across the outside back to cover the open space and create a solid surface for the padding and fabric. Fold the burlap back and staple again.

Ch. 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair

1. Just as we started with the inside back, stretch

3. Cut and sew enough welt cord (see Sewing Tips and Tricks, page 364) to go around the sides and top of the outside back. Open up one end of the welt cord and cut out 1" of cording. Staple the cordless end to the side of the back then continue stapling across the top until you reach the other side. Remove the excess cording and staple the end to the other side. Because we have back scrolls, we’ll wrap the outside back fabric around the sides to cover the wood beneath them. That’s why the welt cord begins at the top of the seat. If you don’t have back scrolls, visit page 195 for instructions for attaching welt cord to a typical outside back.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 119

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

Ch. 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair

slipper chair

120

5. To attach the rest of the outside back, flip the

4. For the sides, open up the end of the welt cord and cut out 1" of cording. Fold the cordless fabric behind the welt cord and staple down the end even with the top of the seat. Continue stapling toward the bottom of the chair. Since we’re attaching the skirt around the bottom of the chair, cut out the cording 1" above the bottom of the frame so the skirt doesn’t staple over it. Then fold under the cordless fabric and staple the end even with the bottom edge of the chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 120

chair upside down for easier access. Change to ½"-long staples and staple Pli-Grip behind the welt cord on the sides, stopping 1" shy of the bottom, since the skirt will staple over this area. Be sure the foot of the Pli-Grip is pushed tightly into the welt cord and staple it down with one prong through the hole and the other to the side of the foot. The Pli-Grip should close toward the welt cord, so check that it’s not backward. When you’ve stapled through every hole, cut off the excess and any sharp corners with an inexpensive pair of scissors. MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

Mama always said,

“Don’t use my good pair of scissors!” Now I’m saying it. When working with metal and cardboard, keep a pair of cheap scissors around so you don’t ruin or dull your good upholstery shears.

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

121 slipper chair

7. When the Pli-Grip is stapled to the sides and

the cording all the way across the top of the outside back.

top, close the teeth and attach a small piece of painter’s tape or masking tape to the sharp corners on the ends to protect the fabric.

8. Cut out a piece of Dacron large enough to cover

9. Smooth the top layer of Dacron over the bottom layer and cut off the excess even with the outside edge of the Pli-Grip. As you cut, be sure the Dacron covers the Pli-Grip but doesn’t go past the outside edge. Trim the excess Dacron 1" above the bottom edge of the chair and even with the wooden edges on the sides.

the outside back. Like we did with the seat, split the layers of Dacron and staple only the bottom layer around the sides and bottom. Staple right behind the Pli-Grip and 1" above the bottom edge so there’s no padding beneath the skirt. Leave the top unstapled.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 121

Ch. 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair

6. Start at one side and staple Pli-Grip behind

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

Ch. 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair

slipper chair

122

10. Using your square and yardstick, measure and cut out a piece of fabric that is centered on the fabric pattern and large enough to cover the outside back with a few extra inches for pulling and stapling. Since the top of the chair is attached with Pli-Grip, anchor the bottom first, then smooth the fabric to the top edge and into the Pli-Grip. Line up the bottom middle of the fabric and outside back and sub-staple the fabric across the bottom of the chair.

12. Smooth the fabric to the top, line up the middles, and use chalk to mark the outside edge of the Pli-Grip.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 122

11. As you approach the legs, make cuts to release the fabric around the inside edges, fold under the fabric, and staple it to the bottom of the frame.

13. Cut off the excess fabric ½" beyond the chalked line.

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

123 slipper chair

15. When you’ve tucked in the fabric all the way across the top, turn your regulator around and use the pointed end to tuck in the last bit of fabric and strings. If you’re having trouble getting all the fabric in the Pli-Grip, try pressing the teeth down further or trimming the excess fabric.

16. With the top and bottom secured, smooth the fabric to one side and staple.

17. Smooth from the top of the side, down, and make a release cut where the fabric meets the top edge of the seat. Follow steps 12–15 to tuck the fabric into the Pli-Grip on the side of the chair.

Ch. 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair

14. Start at the middle and use the flat end of the regulator to tuck the fabric into the teeth of the Pli-Grip. As you work your way out, smooth the excess fabric up and to the sides to prevent wrinkles and puckering.

18. Repeat steps 16 and 17 to attach the other side.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 123

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

Ch. 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair

slipper chair

124

19. Fold under the fabric just above the leg and staple even with the bottom edge of the frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 124

20. When the fabric is in place on all four sides, replace sub-staples with permanents, cut off the excess fabric, and use the rubber mallet to hammer down the Pli-Grip. On this chair, the Pli-Grip is attached under the roll of the back and cannot be hammered down, so close it as tightly as you can with your fingers. See steps 1–18 (pages 284–288) for a variation of closing up the outside back.

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

Supplies Measuring tape Dustcover Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples White or yellow chalk

21. Measure the width and depth of the bottom of the chair and cut out a piece of dustcover a few inches larger than the measurements. Fold under and staple the middle of the front, back, and sides to the bottom of the chair. As you pull the dustcover taut, pull out the wrinkles but avoid stretching it too tightly.

22. Smooth the dustcover to each leg and make

23. Fold under and staple the dustcover all the

cuts to release the material around the sides. Fold under the excess and staple.

way around the edge of the chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 125

Ch. 10: Finishing the Frame of the Slipper Chair

• • • • • • •

slipper chair

Attaching the Dustcover to the Bottom of the Chair

125

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

126

Chapter 11

Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels I agree, the days of ruffled skirtshave passed, but it doesn’t mean a well-tailored skirt can’t add a bit of sophistication to a piece of furniture. Although these slipper chairs would look equally as dashing without a skirt, I’ve decided to attach one to minimize the legginess in the room and add a little variation. On rockers or furniture with unsightly legs, a skirt may be a necessity, so pay attention, even if you’re skipping the skirt.

Measuring and Cutting out the Skirt Panels Supplies • Ruler • White or yellow chalk or water-soluble fabric marker • Cardboard tack strip • Pencil • Paper • Fabric • Square • Yardstick • Scissors • Decking material • Welt cord stick (optional)

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 126

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

127

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

2. Measure from the floor to the marked line above every leg and record the measurements on a piece of paper.

slipper chair

1. As we discussed earlier, we’ll staple the skirt to the top edge of the wooden beam around the bottom of the chair (see step 1 illustration, page 95). Since this beam is 1" thick, make several marks 1" above the bottom edge around the perimeter of the chair. Use a piece of cardboard tack strip and chalk to connect the marks with a line all the way around the chair. Since my fabric is white and yellow chalk doesn’t come out of the fabric completely, I’m using a water-soluble marker to draw the line.

3. Measure and write down the distance between each of the four legs.

4. Using the measurements from steps 2 and 3, draw a diagram to illustrate the finished dimensions of the four main skirt flaps. As is common in most chairs, the chair’s back legs are shorter than the front legs, so the side flaps will be a trapezoid rather than a rectangle.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 127

7/9/13 11:55 AM

5¼"

front panel

5¼"

5"

back panel

5"

23"

31"

5"

5¼" 5¼"

left panel

5"

19"

5" 5¼"

front kick pleats (2)

5"

right panel

19"

5. A small skirt flap called a kick pleat will cover each leg and attach behind the split in the skirt panels. We’ll make them all 5" wide. The ones over the front legs will be the same height as the front skirt flap, while the back panels will be the same height as the back flap.

5" back kick pleats (2)

Cut Dimensions of skirt fabric front panel

6¼"

19"

6¼" 6¼"

6"

right panel 19"

6"

21" 6"

11"

11½"

front kick pleats (2)

front

left panel

front

6"

6"

25"

33"

21"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 128

back panel

6"

back

6¼"

back

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

finished Dimensions of skirt fabric

slipper chair

page

128

back kick pleats (2)

6. The fabric will wrap around to the back of each large skirt flap by ½" on both sides and will require an additional ½" seam allowance on all sides for sewing and stapling at the top. The small kick pleats will be one piece of fabric that folds in half widthwise. We’ll sew the right and left sides shut and attach them at the top, so add ½" seam allowance to all four sides. Draw a diagram to illustrate the dimensions of the fabric when cut.

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

Cut Dimensions of decking material front panel

back panel

6"

23"

6¼"

left panel

6"

right panel

6¼"

6"

19"

19"

33" 61⁄4"

Front 25" 6"

Back

6"

21"

21" Left

61⁄4"

61⁄4" 6"

111⁄2"

Front corner (2)

8. We’ll match the pattern from the tack band to the skirt panels. The front and back flaps will be centered over the same part of the pattern as the seat, inside and outside back. For matching the skirt flaps to the right and left sides of the tack band and boxing, use the illustration from chapter 8, step 5 (page 96) as a reference. We’ll begin the front edges of the side skirt flaps ½" closer to the center of the fabric roll than we did the side pieces for the boxing and tack band to

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 129

Right

6"

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

7. Decking material will line the back of the skirts. Since the fabric covers 1" of the backside as it wraps around, we’ll subtract 1" from the width of the decking material, but we’ll still need ½" allowance on all sides for sewing and stapling. Draw out the cut sizes of the decking material for the backs of the skirts.

31"

slipper chair

6¼"

129

6"

11"

Back corner (2)

accommodate the ½" wrap around to the back of the skirt flaps. Corner panels can be drawn anywhere there’s room since they’re barely visible.

9. Cut out all fabric pieces, including enough single welt cord to reach around the chair (80") (see Sewing Tips and Tricks, page 358). Cut the decking material to the sizes noted in the illustration for step 7.

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

slipper chair

130

Sewing and Attaching Skirt Panels Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot attachment Thread Fabric pieces cut to size 5/32" fiber flex welt cord Scissors T-pins or hand-stapling plier and staples Iron Skirt stiffener Masking tape Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples Cardboard tack strip

11. With good sides facing, pin or staple the sides of the fabric to the sides of the decking pieces for the front skirt flap. With cut edges aligned, stitch the left side and then the right, and remove the staples or T-pins.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 130

10. Stitch all of the single welt cord (see page 364) for the skirt. Fold a kick pleat in half width-wise with good sides facing and stitch the right and left sides shut. Repeat for the other three kick pleats.

12. On the bottom edge of the skirt flap, line up the centers of the fabric and decking material and stitch from one side to the other. When the bottom is sewn, there should be ½" of fabric on each side of the back of the skirt flap. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for the other three flaps.

7/9/13 11:55 AM

page

131 slipper chair

14. Lay each flap on top of the skirt stiffener and

15. We’ll use the welt cord to hold skirt flaps

16. Continue sewing and attaching the flaps side

together side by side. Lay an end of the welt cord on top of the middle of the back skirt flap with the edge of the welt cord tail lined up with the top edge of the back skirt flap. Stitch from the middle to the right side of the flap. When you’re 1" from the right side, lay the left skirt flap adjacent to the back flap.

by side until you get back to where you started. Cut off the excess welt cord 1" past the middle of the back flap. Open up the ends of the welt cord fabric and cut the cording inside so the ends meet.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 131

cut it to the size of the flap minus ¾" in height. Insert the stiffener into the flaps. It’s not necessary to add skirt stiffener to the kick pleats.

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

13. The key to a crisp and tailored skirt is ironing. Turn the flaps right side out and use your fingers to push out the corners and all the seams to the fullest extent. Press the panels so the edges and seams are flat.

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

slipper chair

132

17. Wrap a piece of masking tape around the ends to hold them together.

18. Lay the fabric from the right side straight out and around the welt cord. The fabric from the other side should fold under and wrap around the cording and fabric so no raw edges show.

19. Stitch over the connection of the welt cord ends.

20. Center a kick pleat over a split in the skirt with its top edge ¼" above the edge of the welt cord tail and stitch across the flap. Repeat for the other three kick pleats to complete the skirt sewing. Attach the kick pleat ¼" higher than the other flaps to make sure they hang slightly above the bottom edge of the four main flaps. You could cut the kick pleats so they’re ¼" shorter, but I find it easier to adjust the height this way.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 132

21. Slip the skirt on and line up the pattern. When the skirt is positioned correctly, flip it up and staple the seam allowance to the chair. As you staple, be sure the top edge of the cording is lined up with the marked line from step 1.

22. After stapling, go back and attach cardboard tack strip on top of the seam allowance. Push the cardboard into the welt cord to get a tight connection between the skirt and chair.

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

23. Cut out the template we made in chapter 9 (page 104) with a pair of inexpensive scissors and use it to trace and cut out three identical shapes of panelboard.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 133

Supplies • Traced panelboard from chapter 9 (page 104) • Inexpensive scissors • Panelboard • Permanent marker • Panel nails • Magnetic tack hammer • Spray adhesive • Dacron • Scissors • Fabric • Goggles • Staple gun • 5/32" or 1/4" staples • Single welt cord • Rubber mallet • Air blower

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

These panels require an abundance of patience. Talk sweetly to them, tap lightly, and don’t be discouraged if you find yourself redoing one or even both of them. If you’re having trouble getting the nails to go into the wood without bending, try using shorter, sharper nails or predrill tiny pilot holes where the nails should go in. At the end of a project, it can be frustrating to backtrack or run into a road bump, but just remember, you’re almost there!

slipper chair

Upholstering and Attaching Back Scroll Panels

133

24. Use the magnetic tack hammer to hammer four to six nails through the front of one panel for each side. Evenly space the nails and keep them at least ¼" away from the edges. Remember that the panels are mirror images of each other when determining the front.

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

slipper chair

134

25. Use spray adhesive to attach a second panel to the front of each panel with nails. Press the panels together until there’s a tight bond.

26. Glue Dacron to the front of each panel with

27. Cut out a piece of fabric for the panel that coor-

28. Cut and sew enough welt cord to go around

dinates with the fabric next to its location on the chair and keep the horizontal grain of the fabric parallel to the floor. Be sure you have the short staples in the gun and staple the top, bottom, and sides until the fabric is stapled all the way around. Evenly distribute excess fabric around the curved top to minimize pleating. Make a release cut where the round part connects to the back edge of the panel so the fabric will lie flat as it’s pulled and stapled.

all but the bottom of both panels. Open up 1" of the welt cord fabric and cut out the cording. Fold under the extra fabric and staple the end flush with the bottom edge. Use your index finger and thumb to keep the welt lined up with the edge of the panel. When you reach the bottom of the other side, cut off the excess cording 1" past the bottom. Finish the end just as we started and staple down the rest of the cord. Repeat steps 27 and 28 for the other panel.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 134

spray adhesive. Trim off the excess Dacron ¼" beyond the edges of the panel. Attach a second layer of Dacron if the panelboard is visible through your fabric.

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

slipper chair

For hard floors, the skirt should hang 1/4" from the bottom of the legs, but for carpeted floors, increase that distance to 1/2". When furniture sits on carpet, the weight pushes the legs through the fluff, causing the skirt to touch the ground.

135

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

use the rubber mallet to gingerly tap the nails into the wood. Work in small increments by tapping all the nails from top to bottom in ½" at a time. Continue hammering, little by little, until the panels are flush to the wooden frame. Use the air blower to dust off the chair and you are finished!

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

Ch. 11: Making and Attaching the Skirt and Back Scroll Panels

29. Line up the panels in the correct location and

I must confess: When we did the photo shoot for this chair, the dragon rug hadn’t been completed, so I made the skirt as if the chairs would be sitting on the hardwoods. When the rug arrived, I laid out my furniture as planned and realized I had goofed! The front legs sit on the carpet, causing the skirts to graze the floor — oops! So this pair made another trip back to Spruce for a skirt adjustment.

the finished chair!

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 135

7/9/13 11:56 AM

Project 3

Spread Your Wings

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 136

7/9/13 11:56 AM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 137

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

138

Chapter 12

Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern During the cold winters of 1700sNew England, there was no cozier place than near a fire in the comfort of a wingback. What makes these chairs striking, comfortable, and functional are the padded wings that are soft enough to lean against and large enough to keep drafts out. Although I doubt I’ll need protection from the harsh winters of Austin, Texas, I knew as soon as I finalized the design for the living room that a wingback was the only piece striking enough to be successful as a stand-alone chair. So, after months of scouring antique and vintage shops and nightly Craigslist searches, I finally landed on this curvaceous chair. The wingback has the perfect amount of real estate for showcasing a large and colorful pattern without overwhelming the room. In a space with a variety of shapes, colors, and patterns, one piece must bridge the gap, and this 100 percent linen by No. 9 Thompson connects to every piece: subtle stripes to play off the stripes of the Louis chair, orange for the sofa, and green for the cocktail ottoman. On top of that, the fabric repeat is perfect with the proportions of the chair. The dragon is the same width as the inside back and its height reaches from the top to the bottom of the inside and outside back.

wingback chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 138

Before

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

139 wingback chair Ch. 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern

The simple styling of the wingback is ideal for such a flamboyant pattern, so we’ll keep the new chair similar to the original. To prevent the pattern from getting disconnected as it wraps around the front edge of the cushion, we’ll replace the welt cord with a topstitched seam. And although I like the look of the decorative nailhead trim and the way it brings attention to the curves of the wings and back, I prefer a more discreet and modern finish, so I’ll use black tacks in place of brass. Since the legs are scratched and worn from years of use, I’ll refinish them in a dark brown to complement the chocolate of the fabric. Although our styling changes are minimal, the way we place the pattern on this chair will make a significant impact on the transformation. Since the dragon is the same size as the inside back, we’ll showcase this fire-breathing spectacle front and center with the geometric borders ­covering the sides of the chair and framing the main attraction.

Enter the Dragons in 01 by No. 9 Thompson

The transformation of the wingback comes from the calculated placement of the dragon on the chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 139

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

If you’re looking for a crowd-pleaser, choose blue! It’s by far the most popular selection at Spruce. Can you tell?

Box shapely decks to avoid pleats and wrinkles.

from the spruce archives

design inspiration

140

A solid-colored exterior on this wingback saves money and directs your attention to the striking velvet pattern on the interior.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 140

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

141

design inspiration from the spruce archives

Pattern placement can make or break a transformation. Take the time to plan out every piece of fabric, considering different arrangements of the pattern for the most striking before and after.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 141

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

Ch. 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern

wingback chair

142

Measuring for Fabric outside back (behind) right inside wing

left inside wing right outside wing

left outside wing

inside back

right inside arm

left inside arm front scroll right outside arm

cushion top cushion boxing

front scroll left outside arm

deck

1. Let’s begin by writing down all of the pieces

2. For each piece of fabric, take measurements at

that we need to measure: • Deck • Inside arms (ISAs) • Inside wings (ISWs) • Inside back (ISB) • Outside arms and wings (OSAs and OSWs)

the largest dimensions. Measure the deck all the way around the front of the chair from the left to the right arm (33").

• Outside back (OSB) • Cushion • Cushion front boxing (FB) • Cushion zipper boxing (ZB)

3. The dragon fabric is only used for the front por-

4. For the width of the inside arms, measure from

tion of the deck, which begins 4" behind the front edge of the seat, wraps over the front, and ends at the bottom edge of the chair (9").

the inside back all the way around the front of the arm until the fabric meets the outside arm (29").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 142

7/9/13 11:56 AM

page

143 wingback chair

6. The inside wings are usually less wide where

7. The height of the wings extends from the top of

8. Measure the width of the inside back between the inside wings (20").

the inside arms to the top of the chair (22").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 143

they connect to the inside arms, so measure toward the top where they’re widest (10").

Ch. 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern

5. The height begins at the seat, wraps around the top, and attaches just below the roll of the arm (21").

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

Ch. 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern

wingback chair

144

9. For the height, measure from the deck to the top of the inside back (33").

10. The outside arms and wings are all one piece of fabric. Estimate where the back edge of the wing begins and measure to the connection between the outside and inside arm (21").

11. The height of the outside arms is from the bot-

12. Measure from seam to seam at the top of the

tom to the top of the chair (34").

outside back for the width (22"). Use the measurement from step 11 for the height (34").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 144

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

145

14. Measure the depth of the cushion from the inside back to the front edge (20").

16. To estimate the width of the zipper boxing, add 10" to the width of the cushion (38").

17. We’ll make the cushion 3" thick, so the height for all boxings is 3".

18. In the columns to the right of Height/Depth is the approximate number of inches that should be added to each measurement for pulling and stapling and/or seam allowances. Add these numbers to the measurements from steps 2 through 17 to determine the dimensions we’ll use to determine yardage.

Ch. 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern

15. The width of the front boxing can be determined by using the following formula: Front boxing width = width of cushion + (depth of cushion × 2) = 68"

wingback chair

13. To determine the width of the cushion, measure the distance between the front two corners (28").

Wingback Measurements Fabric Piece

Width

Allowance

Final Width

Height/ Depth

Allowance

Final Height/ Depth

Deck

33"

6"

39"

9"

3"

12"

ISAs

29"

4"

33"

21"

4"

25"

ISWs

10"

4"

14"

22"

4"

26"

ISB

20"

6"

26"

33"

4"

37"

OSAs

21"

3"

24"

34"

3"

37"

OSB

22"

3"

25"

34"

3"

37"

Cushion

28"

2"

30"

20"

2"

22"

FB

68"

1"

69"

3"

1"

4"

ZB

38"

1"

39"

3"

2"

5"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 145

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

Ch. 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern

wingback chair

146

Determining Yardage with a Large Pattern The dragon fabric has a largevertical repeat of 32½", which means every 32½" there is another dragon. At this stage, it’s too difficult to determine exactly how the dragon will be positioned, so we’ll recalculate the heights to be in factors of the vertical repeat, ensuring we have enough fabric to place the dragon exactly where we want it.

Part of the Chair

Measured Height/ Depth

Height/Depth of Vertical Repeat

Deck

12"

32½"

ISAs

25"

32½"

ISWs

26"

32½"

ISB

37"

65"

OSAs

37"

65"

OSB

37"

65"

Cushion

22"

32½"

1. Identify pieces that are 27" wide or less. These pieces can be placed next to each other on the fabric instead of stacked one on top of the other. The inside wings, inside back, outside arms, and outside back are all less than 27" wide. I already decided, however, that the inside and outside back will be positioned in the center of the pattern, so we won’t place these side by side.

2. Take the height of each piece of fabric, except for the boxing, and round up to the nearest factor of the vertical repeat. See table above.

4. Divide this number by 36" (1 yard) to determine the total number of yards needed (10.83). Round up to the nearest whole number and add an extra yard of fabric just in case we make a mistake (12). Cushion boxing and the small pieces on the front of the arms weren’t factored into our yardage calculation, but since we have accounted for more fabric than we really need to achieve optimum pattern matching, we’ll be able to squeeze these small pieces into the leftovers. With a solid or small pattern, this chair would require 8 yards of fabric, but we’ll need 12 to accommodate the large dragon and complete the transformation.

3. Add the new dimensions for heights and don’t forget to double the heights of the inside arms and cushion since there are two inside arms and a top and bottom to the cushion. 32½" (deck) + 65" (ISAs) + 32½" (ISWs) + 65" (ISB) + 65" (OSAs) + 65" (OSB) + 65" (cushion) = 390"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 146

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

147

Supplies for the Wingback Chair Materials

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

3/8" staples 1/2" staples 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Button twine Hand-sewing twine Lightweight spring twine Painter’s or masking tape Paper Pencil Permanent marker Spray adhesive Spring twine Thread T-pins White or yellow chalk

• •

Tools & equipment

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Air blower Button needle Calculator Electric carving knife Goggles Hand-stapling plier (optional) Iron Large curved needle Magnetic tack hammer Magnetic tack hammer with nylon tip Measuring tape Pliers Regulator Scissors Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot Square Square-point upholstery knife Staple gun Staple remover Webbing stretcher Yardstick

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 147

• •

12 yards fabric 5 yards burlap 1 yard cardboard tack strip 2–8 yards cotton batting 7 yards 27"-wide Dacron 1/2 yard decking material 1 box decorative nailhead 1 yard dustcover 1 yard 1" edge roll 1/2 slab 3"–5"-thick high-density foam Horsehair (optional) 16 yards jute webbing 1 slab 2"–3"-thick low-density foam (optional) 5 yards Pli-Grip (optional) 2 yards small edge roll or large fiber flex welt cord 1 yard zipper chain Zipper pull

Ch. 12: Calculating Yardage for a Large Pattern

Basic supplies

wingback chair

OVERVIEW

For more information on tools and materials, visit the glossary (page 369).

7/9/13 11:57 AM

148

Chapter 13

wingback chair

Spring Tying for a Loose Seat

page

When I stripped the wingback chair,I was pleasantly surprised by what I found inside. Instead of disintegrating foam, I found horsehair. In place of worn-out jute, there was steel webbing. Although I rarely keep old stuffing, these expensive and long-lasting materials are worth reusing in the restored chair. I left the steel webbing attached to the springs and chair, so I’ll skip straight to spring tying instead of starting with webbing (see Stripping Furniture, page 353). We already tied springs in project 1, but we’ll make a few changes to our methods to accommodate the loose seat cushion. Since we’re tying springs for a deck instead of a tight seat, our goal is to make the springs as flat as possible. Instead of tying the springs so there’s a crown to the seat, we’ll do our best to tie all springs as low as possible and to the same height. If your coil springs were connected to a straight wire, refer to chapter 21: Spring Tying with an Edge Wire (page 237).

wingback chair

Stripped to the frame

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 148

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

Supplies • • • • • • •

Goggles Magnetic tack hammer 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Spring twine Scissors 1/2" staples Staple gun

wingback chair

Measuring and Attaching Spring Twine

149

1. When you come across steel webbing in good condition, reuse it! It lasts longer and is more durable than jute. Inspect where it’s connected to the frame and reinforce with large upholstery tacks, if necessary. If you removed jute webbing from your chair, refer to pages 29–34 for instructions on attaching webbing and springs. If you don’t have coil springs, refer to chapter 7 for Tying Sinuous Springs (page 83) or attach webbing to the top edge of the frame and skip to chapter 14 (page 155).

2. Just as we did in project 1, use the magnetic tack hammer to place two tacks at both ends of every vertical and horizontal row. Only hammer the tacks in halfway.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 149

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

Ch. 13: Spring Tying for a Loose Seat

wingback chair

150

3. Double over spring twine and stretch it across each row of springs. Add an extra 4" of twine for every spring in the row before cutting the length. Since I have three springs in each horizontal and vertical row, I’ll make the doubled-over twine 12" longer than each row.

4. With the twine doubled over, place the middle loop in between a pair of tacks at the backside of the chair and make a loop around each one. Pull the long ends of twine tightly toward the springs, cinching the loops, then hammer down the tacks. Repeat for every pair of tacks along the back and one side of the chair.

Tying Vertical Rows

5. Pull the left strand of twine from the back mid-

6. Loop the twine around the second rung, mak-

dle tacks under the second rung and up through the center of the back middle spring.

ing a loose knot.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 150

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

151 wingback chair Ch. 13: Spring Tying for a Loose Seat

7. Grab the bottom of the loop and pull it taut with your dominant hand while using your nondominant hand to compress the spring.

8. When you’ve compressed the spring as low as possible, use your nondominant index finger to hold the spring twine tightly against the bottom of the second rung. Release the twine in your dominant hand and pull the end of the twine to cinch the knot around the spring.

9. Check the tightness of the first knot by pulling the spring twine toward the front of the chair. When the spring is compressed, is the top rung centered over the bottom rung? If the answer is no, retie the first knot until the answer is yes.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 151

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

Ch. 13: Spring Tying for a Loose Seat

wingback chair

152

10. Pull the twine under the top rung on the

11. Leverage your hand against the frame to pull

opposite side of the spring and make a loose knot around it. Repeat steps 7–9 to tighten the knot. Continue tying knots to both sides of the top rung of every spring in the row. When you reach the last side of the last spring, go back down to the second rung and tie a knot.

the springs forward and down as you wrap the left strand of twine around the left tack. Pull the slack out of the twine until the springs reach the desired height, and then hammer down the tack to hold the twine in place.

12. Check that the springs in the first row are

13. Go back to the first spring and repeat steps

standing vertically when compressed, not leaning forward or back. Leaning to the right or left is acceptable at this point. Undo the tying and correct leaning, if necessary, then secure the end of twine with a few staples. If the middle spring is slightly higher than the others, don’t worry: it will compress more as we continue tying.

5–9 for the right strand of twine. When you make the loose knot, go around both the second and top rungs.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 152

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

153 wingback chair

When you get to the last side of the last spring, tie the knot around the second and top rung like we did at the beginning. Repeat step 12 to finish the row.

15. Repeat steps 5–14 to tie the other vertical rows to the same height as the first row tied.

Ch. 13: Spring Tying for a Loose Seat

14. Repeat step 10 to continue tying the springs.

Tying Horizontal Rows As we tie the springs horizontally,our goals are to keep the springs upright, with top rung centered over bottom rung, and compress them even more. A simple trick for achieving more compression without exhausting yourself is tying the springs while they’re leaning back toward the tacks. As you pull out the slack at the end and adjust them into an upright position, they’ll be forced downward.

16. Horizontal rows are tied the same way as vertical rows, so repeat steps 5–15 for the horizontal rows, keeping the goals in mind.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 153

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

Ch. 13: Spring Tying for a Loose Seat

wingback chair

154

Tying Diagonal Rows By the time you get to diagonal rows,your springs should be in the desired position. We’ll tie the springs diagonally in both directions to lock the springs together so they move as one unit instead of individual springs. 17. Repeat steps 2–4 to set the tacks for the diagonal rows. Envision the line you’ll create across the springs as you tie them together and orient the pair of tacks so they’re perpendicular to this line. If the frame is obstructed where your tacks should go, scoot them over to the closest available space.

18. Repeat steps 5–15 to tie the rows diagonally in both directions. Always tie diagonal rows toward the front of the chair.

The Quest for Coils Just as car enthusiasts check under the hood, I like to check under the seat when I go shopping for new chairs. Although they require more skill and time to tie — and you may be thinking, Why would I want to do this again? — the support of coil springs is better than any other seat construction and generally a sign of better quality furniture. When you’re out shopping for your next diamond in the rough, place your hand under the seat. If you feel a firm, solid surface even with the bottom edge of the frame, more than likely, the seat has coils. If you feel nothing but a light layer of dustcover, there are no coils.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 154

7/9/13 11:57 AM

Chapter 14

page

155

Padding a T-Shaped Deck Although the cushion will provide mostof the padding in the seat of the chair, we’ll need a light layer of cotton and Dacron to cover the springs and protect the bottom of the cushion from wearing out. When I first started learning upholstery, decks intimidated me. The number of steps, hand sewing, and precision required to successfully upholster a deck can be overwhelming to a beginner, so it’s best to break it into chunks and complete it one step at a time. Just as we did with the tight seats in projects 1 and 2, we’ll cover the springs with burlap and attach edge roll. Then we’ll pad the deck with cotton and Dacron. In chapter 15, we’ll sew and attach the fabric to the chair.

Covering the Springs with Burlap Supplies • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Burlap Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Permanent marker

1. Measure the widest and deepest parts of the seat. Add a few extra inches on all sides for pulling and stapling, and cut out a piece of burlap to that size.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 155

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

wingback chair

156

2. Center the burlap over the seat, pull the back

3. With the back middle attached, pull the burlap

middle through the frame, and attach with a few staples. Be careful to avoid the tacks from spring tying when stapling.

tightly to the front and staple the front middle.

4. With this rounded arm post, we’ll make several cuts around the curve to release the burlap (see page 44 for more on release cuts).

5. Staple the burlap on either side of the arm post before making the next release cut.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 156

7/9/13 11:57 AM

page

157 wingback chair

release cut at the back where the back leg meets the deck and staple the burlap on either side.

7. When you’ve made and stapled around the cuts on one side, repeat steps 4–6 for the opposite side.

8. Staple down the burlap around all four sides, fold the excess back, and staple again.

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

6. On the same side of the chair, perform another

Attaching Edge Roll Supplies • • • • • •

1" edge roll Permanent marker Square-point upholstery knife Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples

9. With the flat side of the edge roll on the bottom and the tail extending into the center of the chair, position the cut end of the edge roll ½" away from the front of the left arm (see page 45 for an illustration about edge roll placement). Mark a line across the edge roll with the permanent marker even with the front edge of the chair. Mark two lines coming out from the first line at 45 degrees.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 157

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

wingback chair

158

10. With the square-point upholstery knife, cut on the 45-degree lines to remove the edge roll in between them. Be careful not to cut all the way through the edge roll.

11. Use your nondominant hand to line up the edge roll with the edge of the frame while stapling through the tail on the backside to attach it to the chair. Bend the edge roll at the front left corner and continue stapling across the front of the chair.

12. Stop stapling a few inches before the right cor-

13. When the edge roll is stapled all the way

ner, repeat step 9 to make a mark even with the right edge of the chair, and repeat step 10. After removing the edge roll in the corner, bend it and line it up with the right edge of the deck. Make another mark ½" from the front of the right arm and cut all the way through the edge roll on the marked line. Continue stapling the edge roll until you reach the right arm.

around, secure the front side by pinching off and stapling small sections to the front of the frame. These staples lock the edge roll in place, keeping it from rocking back and forth. As you staple, be careful not to push the edge roll back behind the wooden edge.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 158

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Supplies • • • • • •

Ruler Measuring tape Permanent marker Yardstick Pencil Paper

14. First, mark a parallel line 4" behind the front of

15. Measure and write down the distance between

the edge roll. Stop 4" from the right and left sides. Draw a perpendicular line at either end of the first line, extending toward the back of the chair and stopping 3" behind the front of the arms. Finally, draw a perpendicular line from the ends of the last lines to the inside arms.

the front two corners (26½").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 159

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

Before we pad the deck, we’ll mark a few lines to determine the division between the front and back portions of the deck and take measurements for the fabric. With a T-shaped deck, extend the fabric behind the front of the arms by 3" so that the beige decking material doesn’t show if gapping occurs between the cushion and the scroll during sitting.

wingback chair

Marking and Measuring for the Deck Fabric

159

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

wingback chair

160

16. Find the depth of the decking material by measuring from the first marked line in step 14 to the back edge of the chair (20½"). Then find the depth/height of the front portion of the deck by measuring from the same line, over the front, and to the bottom edge of the frame (9").

Padding the Deck Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Cotton batting Dacron Scissors Large curved needle Hand-sewing twine Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples T-pins

17. Feel the surface of the springs and find any low spots. Fill in noticeable dips with small pieces of cotton batting. When the surface is even, place a full layer of cotton batting over the back portion of the deck, starting 1" behind the marked line. Use your hands to tear off the cotton just shy of where you stapled the burlap in step 8.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 160

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

161 wingback chair

as the back portion of the deck and lay it over the cotton batting. Thread a curved needle with about 24" of hand-sewing twine and insert it through the Dacron and burlap just inside the left arm. Bring the needle and twine out right next to the entrance point.

20. Bring the right strand up and over the left strand and itself.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 161

19. We’ll make a slipknot to anchor the twine. With an end of twine in each hand, shorten the right side to approximately 6" and place it under the left strand.

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

18. Cut a piece of Dacron the same shape and size

21. Bring the right strand behind itself and through the middle of the loop. Pull the right side until the knot is tight then pull the left strand to cinch the knot around the Dacron and burlap. Tie two knots on top of the slipknot to anchor the twine in place.

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

wingback chair

162

22. Hand-sew the Dacron to the burlap along the backside of the marked line. Thread the curved needle with the long end of twine, insert the needle through the Dacron and burlap about 2" from the slipknot and bring it out next to the entrance point, staying lined up with the marked line.

23. Pull the needle and thread under the twine coming from the slipknot and tighten the twine over the Dacron. Insert the needle 2" from the last entrance point and pull it out directly next to it. Continue repeating this step until you have 6" of twine remaining. Then tie off the stitch with a knot and start a new length of twine, as we did in steps 18–21.

24. Continue sewing until you’ve stitched the Dacron along the backside of the marked line. Make release cuts at the back posts so the Dacron lies flat, then secure the back, right, and left sides by stapling the Dacron where we stapled the burlap.

25. Cover the front portion of the deck with

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 162

Dacron. As the Dacron wraps around the front, cut out the excess in the corners and pin them closed with T-pins. Make release cuts around the scroll of the arm so the Dacron lies flat, but be sure the Dacron covers the front portion of the deck. Repeat steps 18–24 to stitch the corners closed and attach the Dacron along the front side of the marked line. Remove the T-pins.

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

163 wingback chair

27. When the dip is filled in to the height of the

the edge roll with several layers of cotton. (I saved the padding from the original chair, so I’m using horsehair instead.)

edge roll, cover the front portion of the deck with a full layer of cotton. Stop 1" shy of the bottom edge of the chair. Staple the cotton near the bottom edge to tack it in place.

28. Pull the Dacron forward over the cotton and

29. After the Dacron is stapled, trim it even with

staple to the bottom front of the chair. As you staple, split the Dacron in half and only staple the bottom half. The top half will cover the dimples made by the staples. Continue stapling across the front edge and around the sides.

the bottom edge of the chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 163

Ch. 14: Padding a T-Shaped Deck

26. Flip the Dacron back and fill in the dip behind

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

164

Chapter 15

Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric One of the trickiest parts ofpattern-matching a print this large is figuring out what goes on the deck. As we discussed in chapter 12, the plan is to get a full dragon down the inside back. If we plan it carefully, we can get a second dragon on top of the cushion wrapping over the front boxing and down the deck. Since we don’t have any padding or fabric on the inside back or cushion, we’ll use our measurements from the yardage estimate to work backward and find the appro­priate piece of fabric for the deck.

Cutting out the Deck Fabric Supplies • • • • • • •

Fabric White or yellow chalk Air blower Square Yardstick Scissors Decking material

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 164

1. Before you get started, do a chalk test by making small marks on the fabric, one in white and one in yellow chalk, and use the air blower to determine which color comes out easiest.

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

165

30"

Cushion front boxing

3"

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

20"

Cushion top

wingback chair

ISB

Visible deck fabric

2. Go back to the original measurements from the yardage estimate and find the height of the ISB before allowances were added (33"). Subtract the 3" thickness of the cushion to determine the amount of visible fabric on the inside back (30"). From the top of the dragon horns, measure 30" down and make a small mark in chalk.

4. Since we know the boxing is 3" before allowances, make another mark 3" down from the last mark. The deck should meet the bottom of the cushion boxing at this mark. Using this point as a reference, find the same part of the repeat closest to the cut edge and make a small mark.

3. Find the depth of the cushion before allowances (20"). Make another mark 20" down from the mark made in step 2.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 165

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

wingback chair

166

41⁄2" 12"

5. In the last chapter, we determined that the fab-

6. Use the final height/depth of the deck from

ric extends 4" behind the front edge of the deck. Use the square and yardstick to draw a straight line all the way across the fabric 4½" above the last mark made. The extra ½" is the seam allowance needed to attach the fabric to the decking material.

chapter 12 (12") to determine the distance between the first line drawn to the parallel line you draw below it. This will be the bottom edge of the deck fabric (see illustration above).

When squaring lines on fabric, always square to the pattern of the fabric instead of the selvage edge.

A 71⁄2"

A 131⁄4"

Top edge

131⁄4"

71⁄2"

411⁄2"

7. Mark the middle of the fabric on the top line. Find the measurement from step 15, page 159 (26½") and divide it in half (13¼"). Make a mark 13¼" to the right and left of the center mark (A).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 166

8. Make two more marks 7½" beyond the last two marks. 7½" is the measurement from the front edge of the deck to the line 3" behind the front of the arms (7") plus ½" for seam allowance. Use the square to draw the right and left sides of the deck at the 7½" marks.

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

167

A

C

C 41⁄2"

A

41⁄2"

9. To wrap the fabric around the front corners of the chair without pleating, we’ll cut out triangles at the corners and seam the fabric together. Measure down 4½" from mark A and make a mark (B). Go back to A, measure and mark 4½" to the right and left of it (C). Draw straight lines connecting points B with C to make two triangles.

41⁄2" B

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

B 41⁄2"

C

wingback chair

C

10. Cut on the lines marked for all four sides of the deck and cut out the triangles drawn in step 9.

11. Add ½" to the decking material depth from step 16, page 160 (21") and use the distance from corner to corner (26½") as the width. Cut out a piece of decking material to these dimensions.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 167

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Sewing the Deck

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

wingback chair

168

D

A

B

E

C

A

B

D E

Supplies • • • • •

Fabric and decking material cut to size T-pins or hand-stapling plier and staples Sewing machine Thread Scissors

12. With good sides facing and cut edges aligned, pin or hand-staple edges A and B together and stitch to make the front corners of the deck.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 168

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

169 wingback chair

14. At the corner seam, lay edge D (good side facing down) on the decking material, perpendicular to edge C, and stitch it to the decking material. Repeat for the other side.

15. Lay down the fabric on the left side of the deck on top of the decking material with edge E perpendicular to edge D. Fold under the ½" seam allowance on edge E and topstitch edge E to the decking material. Repeat for the right side.

16. Before we attach the fabric to the chair, inspect all of the seams and make sure they’re tightly sewn. Then cut off the excess decking material (leave ½" of seam allowance) behind the corner made by edges D and E.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 169

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

13. With good sides facing, center edge C on the front edge of the decking material and stitch between the seams made in step 12. Remove any T-pins or staples.

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

wingback chair

170

Attaching the Deck Fabric to the Chair Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Sewn fabric for deck Button needle Button twine Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples T-pins Large curved needle Hand-sewing twine White or yellow chalk Staple remover Pliers 17. Cut a 12" length of button twine and thread one end through the button needle. Pull the needle and twine through the seam allowance of the deck fabric at the corner made by edges C and D. Remove the needle and make a knot in the button twine to anchor it to the fabric.

18. Rethread the needle with the button twine and insert it through the same corner of the chair.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 170

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

171

start here

5

3 1

6 7

9

8

21. Rethread the curved needle and insert it next

20. Pull the seam allowance of the deck fabric

22. Insert the curved needle next to the slipknot

toward the front portion of the deck and pin the machine-sewn line to the marked line on the chair. Anchor the deck material just inside the left arm with a slipknot made around the seam allowance and burlap (see steps 18–21, page 161).

again and pull it out 4" beyond the last entrance point. Insert the needle 2" back and pull it out 4" farther. At corners, use the same stitch but shorten the stitch length to maneuver around the turns.

23. Repeat this backstitch, moving 4" forward

24. Tightly pull the fabric forward over the pad-

then 2" back until the deck is sewn all the way across the chair. Remove the T-pins.

ding and sub-staple the middle to the bottom of the chair (see page 53 for how to sub-staple).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 171

to the slipknot approximately ¼" in front of the machine-sewn line. Pull the needle and twine out 2" beyond the entrance point, keeping the handsewn line parallel to the machine-sewn line.

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

19. Pull the twine firmly through the bottom of the chair and staple it to the frame. If the twine starts to slip through the staple, fold it back and staple again. Repeat steps 17–19 to anchor the other corner.

wingback chair

4

2

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

wingback chair

172

25. Pull the decking material to the back of the

26. Smooth the fabric toward the right arm and

chair and center it over the back edge of the frame. Sub-staple it in place.

use your fingers to feel the edges of the wooden arm post. Draw a release cut in chalk on the excess fabric.

27. Carefully cut on the chalked lines to release the fabric around the front scroll. Pull the fabric around the post and secure on each side with sub-staples.

29. Smooth the decking material toward the back right corner and make a cut to release the fabric around the back leg post. Fold the edges under and sub-staple on either side of the post. Repeat for the left side.

28. Repeat steps 26 and 27 for the left side.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 172

7/9/13 11:58 AM

page

173 wingback chair

sub-stapling from the middle toward the left leg. When you’re within a few inches of the leg, pull the fabric taut over the front left corner, and mark and make straight cuts to release the fabric around the corners of the leg. Fold the fabric under on either side of the leg and sub-staple it to the bottom of the chair. Repeat this step for the right side.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 173

31. When the deck is smooth and secured on all four sides, go back and replace sub-staples with permanent staples. Staple the flap of fabric in front of the arm to the front of the arms (see step 27). Fold under and staple the fabric over the leg even with the bottom edge of the chair.

32. When the deck is completely stapled, trim off the excess fabric.

Ch. 15: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric

30. Go back to the front middle and continue

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

174

Breakdown of the Deck There are many steps in constructing a deck, so I’ve dog-eared a page in my notebook to help jog my memory. Here’s the abridged version of what we did in chapters 14 and 15. 1. Cover the springs with burlap. 2. Attach edge roll. 3. Mark the division between the front and

back portions of the deck. 4. Write down measurements for the

fabric. 5. Cover the back portion with cotton

batting. 6. Hand-sew and staple Dacron to the back

8. Fill in behind the edge roll with cotton

batting. 9. Cover the front portion with one layer of

cotton batting. 10. Staple the Dacron over the cotton and

front portion of the deck. 11. Cut out and sew the fabric pieces. 12. Hand-sew fabric to the deck. 13. Staple the fabric in place!

portion of the deck. 7. Hand-sew the Dacron to the front por-

tion of the deck.

wingback chair

Deck complete

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 174

7/9/13 11:59 AM

Chapter 16

page

175

Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings The arms of a wingback are what defineits name and give it that striking yet classic silhouette. Because of the curvy shape and juncture of the arm and wing, upholstering the arms requires a few extra steps, including draping and seaming pieces together. Since I salvaged the original padding from the chair, I’ll be reusing the horsehair and supplementing it with cotton batting and Dacron. If you’re starting from scratch, use multiple layers of cotton in place of the horsehair or attach a light layer of cotton followed by foam and Dacron.

Attaching Webbing and Burlap to the Arms On most furniture, the fabric pulls through the space between the inside arms and back. The goal is to staple materials from the inside arm and back to the interior of this space to minimize a buildup of layers on the back surface of the chair. Since the space is particularly small on this wingback, we’ll stop padding just shy of it to prevent overcrowding.

At the bottom of the arms, attach burlap to the horizontal wooden bar just above the deck. For the wing, attach webbing and burlap to the wood inside the edges of the wing.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 175

Pull through here

indicates staple lines for burlap

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

wingback chair

176

Supplies • • • • • • • • • •

Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Measuring tape Burlap Cotton batting Permanent marker

1. Stretch and staple webbing across the inside arms and wings to reinforce the open spaces in the frame (see page 29 for stretching and stapling webbing).

2. The roll on top of the arm needs shaping with a pocket of cotton. Cut a piece of burlap large enough to cover the top of the arm with a few extra inches for pulling and stapling. Staple one side of the burlap to the wood forming the roll on the outside of the arm. Fold the excess back and staple again.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 176

3. Fill in the roll of the arm with cotton. Pack the cotton tightly so pressure doesn’t flatten it down.

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

177 wingback chair

5. Stretch and staple burlap to the arms and

eter of the cotton to hold it in place so it doesn’t squish out of the burlap with use.

wings (independently) to create a solid surface for attaching padding. Make release cuts around the posts at the back of the arm so the burlap lies smooth and flat.

Padding the Inside Arms and Wings

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

4. Staple the burlap over and around the perim-

Supplies • Small edge roll or large fiber flex welt cord • Goggles • Staple gun • 3/8" staples • Cotton batting or horsehair • 1"–2"-thick low-density foam (optional) • Electric carving knife (optional) • Permanent marker (optional) • Square-point upholstery knife • Large curved needle • Button twine • Dacron • Scissors • Spray adhesive

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 177

6. Since the arms get a lot of wear from sitting and standing, we’ll follow the same steps from chapter 14 (pages 157–158) to staple edge roll around the front scroll. Use a small edge roll or a larger fiber flex welt cord to avoid bulking up the arms.

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

178

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

wingback chair

7. Place padding over the arms and wings, stopping even with the edges of the frame. If you’re using cotton, cover the arms with three or four full sheets of cotton. To give foam arms a rounder shape, use a layer of cotton, followed by 1"–2"thick low-density foam. Depending on the contours between the wing and the arm, it may be necessary to apply foam separately to each piece so the padding lies flat. Staple the padding along the edge of the frame to hold it in place. Refer to pages 264–265 for instructions for tracing and attaching foam to arms.

8. Although staples and Dacron do a great job of holding loose padding in place, it’s always a good idea to reinforce horsehair by hand-sewing it to the burlap with bridle ties. Anchor the ends of the stitch with knots and weave the curved needle back and forth through the horsehair and burlap until the sections of padding are tight to the frame. Although an alternating horseshoe configuration is standard, I prefer stitches in the shape of X for horizontal and vertical support.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 178

9. After attaching the padding, fill in indentations made by the staples or stitches with small pieces of horsehair or cotton.

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

179 wingback chair

11. Make cuts to release the Dacron around the

only the inside arm. Be sure the Dacron is tall and wide enough to cover the front roll of the arm adjacent to the deck. Push 10" of Dacron under the arm, pull the top edge over the arm, and staple the Dacron just under the roll. To get the Dacron to lie flat as it’s pulled around the arm, make a release cut where the wing and arm meet at the front of the wing.

back leg post and front scroll. Pull the Dacron around the front roll near the deck, and then staple the Dacron to the back edge of the roll. Leave the Dacron under the arm unstapled.

12. Since the pull-through space between the

13. Cut another piece of Dacron large enough to

arm and inside back is snug, cut the back edge of the Dacron even with the frame and barely tuck it into the gap. Smooth and staple the Dacron to the phone-shaped exposed wood at the front of the arm, also known as the front scroll.

cover the wing and staple tightly to the outside edge of the curve. Just as we did with the arm, make release cuts at the front of the wing to get the Dacron to lie flat as it’s pulled around and barely tuck the back edge of the Dacron into the pull-through space.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 179

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

10. Cut a piece of Dacron large enough to cover

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

wingback chair

180

14. When you’re finished stapling, cut off the

15. To connect the Dacron between the wing and

excess Dacron as close to the staples as possible.

arm, use a little spray adhesive to stick the edges together. Be sure the glue is dry before moving on to the fabric.

Cutting and Sewing the Inside Arms and Wings Inside arms and wings can be upholstered separately, but in most cases, they’re seamed together and treated as one unit. When I started upholstering, I tried, again and again, to use one solid piece of fabric to upholster the wing and arm together, and every time it failed. The slight shift in surfaces between the arm and wing, combined with the need for extra fabric as the fabric wraps around the curves, make it impossible to get a wrinkle-free and cleanly upholstered arm out of one piece of fabric. To determine the fabric pattern, we’ll drape fabric over the inside arm and wing independently, chalk a line where the fabric pieces meet, and cut and stitch together the pieces. When stripping wingbacks, it can be useful to save the fabric from the arms as a reference for making a new pattern. But avoid tracing old patterns, as the fit will be slightly different with new padding.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 180

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Fabric Square White or yellow chalk Yardstick Scissors Permanent marker Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Sewing machine Thread Regulator Staple remover Pliers

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

181

LISA

LISW

17. Cut out the pieces and draw a line on the Dacron with permanent marker at the division between the wing and inside arm.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 181

age estimate to determine the rough size of the fabric needed for the inside arms (33" wide × 25" tall) and inside wings (14" wide × 26" tall) (see page 145). Proceeding with the original plan, we’ll flank the inside back with the geometric border. To do so, we’ll need to begin the back edges of the arms and wings even with the edges of the fabric. Draw the left pieces on the right side of the fabric and vice versa. To keep the arms as symmetrical as possible, align the top edges of all pieces at the same point of the vertical repeat.

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

RISA

16. Use the measurements from the original yard-

wingback chair

RISW

18. As you draw around the outside of the wing and arm, split the difference between the arm and wing by drawing a diagonal line.

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

wingback chair

182

19. Position the arm fabric so the back edge is 1" beyond the back edge of the wing and there’s enough fabric at the bottom to reach the bottom of the frame under the front roll of the arm. Substaple the bottom middle and top middle. When stapling the top edge, staple on the flat surface of the outside arm, not on the roll of the arm.

20. Adjust the fabric so the pattern is straight with the grain of the fabric parallel to the ground, and then draw and make cuts similar to the ones we made in the deck fabric to release the fabric around the front scroll (see chapter 15, steps 26 and 27). Use a few sub-staples to tack the fabric in place.

21. At the back of the arm, make a cut to release the fabric around the horizontal bar at the bottom of the inside back. Secure the cut on either side with a few sub-staples.

22. Smooth the fabric up toward the wing and make a few cuts in the excess fabric down to the drawn line so the fabric lies flat as it wraps the connection between the wing and arm. When you make the cut at the front of the wing, angle the scissors’ handle toward the back of the chair so there’s extra fabric to cover the diagonal line you drew on the outside arm. Add a few more sub-staples, where needed, to keep the arm fabric in position.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 182

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

183 wingback chair

24. Draw a line across the arm and wing to show

25. Remove the fabric from the chair and cut

26. After you check the fit, lay the fabric flat under the sewing foot with the good side up and both seam allowances lying under the arm side of the seam. Topstitch the fabric approximately ¼" away from the seam on the arm side to hold the seam allowances in place and reinforce the connection between the arm and wing.

½" beyond the chalked lines. With good sides together, line up the cut edges and the mark from step 24. Stitch from the mark to the edge of one side. Go back to the mark, flip over the fabric, and stitch to the other side. As you sew, be sure to keep the cut edges aligned.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 183

where the two pieces align.

With arms, it’s far more efficient to assemblyline the steps. Pad both arms, one after the other, and after you’ve draped the fabric and determined the pattern, trace the pattern for the other arm. Remember to mirror the fabric pieces so the arms are symmetrical.

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

23. Sub-staple the wing fabric at the top and sides with the pattern straight and lined up with the pattern on the inside arm. Repeat step 22 to make release cuts in the wing where it connects to the arm. Fold back the fabric on the arm and wing so the folded edges meet the drawn line. Carefully chalk the folded edges to show where they meet.

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

wingback chair

184

27. Sub-staple the arm and wing to the chair in the same position as before and make a cut to release the wing around the post across the top of the inside back.

28. At the top of the wing, staple the flaps from the release cut to the wooden frame of the inside and outside back.

release cut

29. As the fabric wraps around the front scroll,

30. Make small release cuts to split the fabric

evenly space pleats to disburse the excess fabric. Use a regulator to smooth out the fabric in the folds and get the pleats crisp and tight (see page 110).

around the edge of the front scroll as the fabric wraps to the underside and backside of the rolls of the arm.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 184

7/9/13 11:59 AM

page

31. Fold under the fabric where the front roll of

32. When the fabric is wrinkle-free and sub-­ stapled in place, remove the subs and replace with permanent staples. Upholster the second arm, matching the pattern placement as closely as possible.

wingback chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 185

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

Because the curve of these wings is slight, I was able to staple the fabric without pleating, but it’s often necessary to make pleats to neatly disburse the excess fabric around the curve. If you’re having trouble getting the fabric smooth, follow step 29 to add pleats to the wing.

wingback chair

the arm meets the deck, pull tightly, and staple the bottom of the chair.

185

Deck and inside arms complete

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

Ch. 16: Upholstering the Inside Arms and Wings

wingback chair

186

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

Now that you’ve draped and sewn fabric together, you have the skills to upholster all sorts of furniture. The arms and backs of all these pieces are draped and seamed together just like the arms of the wingback chair. MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 186

7/9/13 12:00 PM

Chapter 17

page

187

Upholstering the Inside Back In addition to horsehairand steel webbing, I also found coil springs when I stripped this chair. It’s rare to find pieces with coil-sprung backs, and when you do, it’s a sign of great quality. Tying coil springs in the back is very similar to tying springs in the seat. Because the back does not provide as much support as the seat, the springs are less firm, smaller, and only need to be tied vertically and horizontally to stay in place. I also use a lightweight jute twine since the springs are thin and easily held in place with thinner rope. If you are upholstering arms that require no seaming, follow the steps from this chapter to complete them.

Attaching Webbing and Tying Springs on the Inside Back No coil springs? No problem!You’re probably working with a chair that doesn’t have coil springs in the back. If you have sinuous (zigzag) springs, see page 83 for tying instructions, and then continue with step 6. If you don’t have any springs, after completing steps 1–3, skip straight to step 6.

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Back springs Klinch-It (optional) Klinch-It staples (optional) Button needle Button twine Magnetic tack hammer 10-ounce tacks Lightweight spring twine

1. Attach vertical strips of webbing to the inside back. Staple the webbing to the bottom bar with 2" of extra length beyond the staples. Fold the excess back and staple again.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 187

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

Ch. 17: Upholstering the Inside Back

wingback chair

188

2. Pull the webbing to the top of the inside back and over the teeth of the webbing stretcher. Leverage the stretcher against the frame and staple as you stretch the webbing tightly. Leave the webbing connected to the roll until you’ve attached both ends to the chair, and then cut 2" beyond the staples at the top of the chair. Fold over and staple the excess down. Because the back needs less support, it’s acceptable to leave small gaps between the strips. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all vertical rows are stapled.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to staple all horizontal strips. Because the support beams at the top and bottom of the back are recessed behind the beams on the left and right, I’m pulling the horizontal strips of webbing behind the vertical ones instead of weaving back and forth. This method pushes the vertical strips forward so the inside back isn’t concave.

4. Lay the chair on its back and evenly space the

5. Repeat steps 18–34 (pages 34–39) to tie the springs with a domed shape. Since back springs are smaller and less resistant, use cheaper, lightweight spring twine for tying.

back springs on the webbing. Use the Klinch-It tool to attach the springs to the webbing (page 237) or hand-sew springs to the webbing with a button needle and button twine (page 32).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 188

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

Supplies Measuring tape Burlap Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Cotton batting or horsehair Large curved needle (optional) Button twine (optional) 2"–3"-thick low-density foam (optional) Permanent marker Electric carving knife (optional) Dacron Fabric Square White or yellow chalk Yardstick Staple remover Pliers

Ch. 17: Upholstering the Inside Back

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

wingback chair

Padding and Upholstering the Inside Back

189

6. Cut out a piece of burlap large enough to cover the inside back with a few extra inches for pulling and stapling. Stretch and staple it to the beams where we stapled the webbing, fold back the excess and staple again.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 189

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

7. If you’re only using cotton for padding, cover

190

Ch. 17: Upholstering the Inside Back

wingback chair

the inside back with three to five layers. I will reuse the horsehair from the original chair and plump it up with an additional layer of cotton. There should be enough layers so you don’t feel the individual springs through the padding. If foam is your padding of choice, start with a light, allover layer of cotton followed by 2"-thick lowdensity foam (see pages 277–278, steps 4 and 6, for tracing and attaching foam). Staple the padding along the top edge of the back and tuck in the other sides.

8. Before attaching Dacron, hand-sew bridle ties, if necessary (step 8, page 178). Cut a sheet of Dacron large enough to cover the inside back. Pull it through the bottom and staple it to the top of the outside back. Trim the excess from the sides so they barely tuck into the pull-through space. Trim off the excess Dacron at the bottom and just past the staples at the top.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 190

9. Measure the largest width and height of the inside back and add 4"–6" to each dimension for pulling and stapling (26" wide × 37" tall).

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

1"

191 wingback chair

Inside back fabric

A 26"

10. We already determined the pattern placement on the inside back when we cut out the deck fabric (see page 165). Since the marks we made in that illustration denoted the edges of the visible fabric (from the top of the cushion to the top edge of the inside back), we need to add a few inches to the

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 191

6"

Ch. 17: Upholstering the Inside Back

37"

top and bottom for pulling and stapling. At the bottom, add 3" to reach the deck and 3" for pulling through the bottom and stapling. At the top, add 1" for pulling and stapling. Draw lines to indicate the edges of the inside back fabric.

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

Ch. 17: Upholstering the Inside Back

wingback chair

192

11. Cut out the fabric and drape it over the inside back. Center the dragon between the arms and sub-staple 1" of fabric to the top of the outside back. Tightly pull the fabric through the bottom and sub-staple. The distance from the deck to mark A should be 3". Make adjustments to the vertical positioning of the fabric until the pattern is correctly placed, and then sub-staple the middles of the right and left sides.

wingback chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 192

12. Perform release cuts around the bars at the bottom and top of the inside back. Fold under the excess fabric where the inside back meets the top of the wings and staple to the outside back. Continue sub-stapling the fabric on all four sides. Double-check the pattern placement, and then replace sub-staples with permanent staples.

Deck, inside arms, and inside back complete

7/9/13 12:00 PM

It’s not (always) easy being green. There’s a fine balance to be struck between ecofriendly, economical, and long-lasting upholstery. Over the years, I’ve done a lot of research in an effort to provide clients with the most affordable and healthy options for their homes. In a perfect world, traditional upholstery materials, such as horsehair, would be applied with the techniques developed by our upholstery ancestors. But the time and cost associated with these methods and materials are cost-prohibitive for most people. When considering how to pad your furniture, ask yourself these questions: 1. How much use will this piece get, and how long do I expect it to last?

for the last 20 years. For other projects, I recommend starting fresh with padding you know is clean. Here are some tips for combining ecofriendly and modern upholstery materials to achieve a happy medium.

Research foam options From natural rubber to polyurethane foam, the options are vast. Natural latex foams are longlasting and the most eco-friendly, but are also costly. If you’re on a tight budget, choose a synthetic foam without the added chemicals that can jeopardize the health of your home.

4. Am I on a stringent budget?

Use natural products to supplement Supplement foam with layers of cotton to significantly reduce the percentage of synthetic padding without decreasing the comfort. Cushions wrapped in feathers use 50–66 percent less foam than standard foam cushions.

Don’t worry: Your character and values are not being judged. One of the great things about custom upholstery is that you have the chance to answer these personal questions and tailor your furniture to your needs. The recipe I’ve found that works for most people is a combination of natural and synthetic materials. With projects like this wingback surface, I always recommended reusing as much of the horsehair as possible, provided that it hasn’t lived in a barn

Don’t forget the fabric Many times we consider the innards of our furniture without examining the fabric. Don’t forget that the fabric is our first point of contact with a piece of furniture. Although fabric companies are developing more eco-friendly fabrics for the home, do your own research and make informed decisions about what you consider healthy and practical for your space.

2. Do I or family members have allergy issues? 3. Am I willing to compromise the cosmetics of my furniture to use natural or organic padding and fabric?

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 193

page

193

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

194

Chapter 18

Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim Closing up the frame of a wingbackcan be tricky. Generally, the outside arms and wings are on separate planes, requiring upholstery of each piece individually. In that scenario, the outside wings attach first, followed by the outside arms, and finally the outside back. On this wingback, the arms and wings are connected as one solid piece on a flat plane. And since the outside back curves around to the arms without a sharp corner dividing the two, we’ll seam the outside arm and back fabric together and upholster the outside of the chair all at once.

Standard construction of a wingback

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 194

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

Supplies Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Measuring tape Burlap Pencil Paper Fabric Square

• • • • • • • • • • •

White or yellow chalk Yardstick T-pins Sewing machine Thread Hand-stapling plier and staples (optional) Pli-Grip (optional) Masking tape (optional) Dacron Staple remover Pliers

1. Just as we did with the inside arms and back,

2. To create a smooth surface for padding and fab-

stretch and staple vertical strips of webbing to add structure to the outside arms and back. Since the sitter never rests weight against these surfaces, attach strips every 4"–6".

ric, cover the openings on the outside of the chair with a tight layer of burlap.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 195

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

• • • • • • • • • • • •

wingback chair

Upholstering the Outside of the Chair

195

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

wingback chair

196

3. It’s easier to determine the fabric pattern for

4. Measure the width of the outside back at the

the outside of the chair before the padding is attached, so record your measurements and then cut out and stitch the fabric together. Measure the top width of the outside back (22").

bottom between the legs (19").

5. Measure the total width of the outside arms

6. To determine the height of the back and arm

and wings (22").

pieces, measure from the top to the bottom of the outside back (34").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 196

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

197 wingback chair

Outside back

Left outside arm/wing

8. Center the outside back fabric on the chair and lightly tack it in place with a few sub-staples or T-pins. Tack the arm pieces in place with the pattern straight and lined up with the inside arms and wings. With all three pieces in the desired location, mark a line across the connection between the arms and back to show where they should match when sewn together.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 197

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

Right outside arm/wing

7. To stay consistent with the fabric placement on the inside of the chair, we’ll center the body of the dragon on the outside back and flank the sides with the geometric pattern. We’ll take the left arm and wing from the right side of the fabric and vice versa so we can begin the geometric pattern right next to the dragon and match it to the pattern on the inside arms and wings. We’ll add 4" to every dimension for pulling and stapling, and then draw and cut out the fabric pieces for the outside back and arms and wings.

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

wingback chair

198 9. Make small marks at the top of all three pieces where they meet the right and left edges of the inside back. At the bottom, mark where the fabric pieces meet the inside of the legs.

10. Remove the fabric from the chair and draw lines from mark to mark to define the sewn edges. Cut ½" beyond each line and stitch the arm pieces to the back piece using the marks from step 8 to line them up vertically. When all three pieces are sewn together, check the fit, and then reinforce the seams with topstitching and remove any T-pins or staples. (See step 26, page 183.) Since we’re applying decorative nailhead trim around the perimeter of the outside arms and back, we’ll staple the fabric to the chair instead of tucking it into Pli-Grip. To use Pli-Grip to invisibly attach the fabric, see pages 286–288, steps 8–18.

11. Cut out one piece of Dacron big enough to cover the outside of the chair. Split and staple the Dacron 1" shy of the exterior edges of the outside arms and back.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 198

12. Trim off the excess Dacron just beyond the staples.

7/9/13 12:00 PM

page

199 wingback chair

(dragon centered on back, outside arms patternmatched with inside arms) and use T-pins or sub-staples to hold the fabric on the chair while you work. Starting with the top of the right seam, trim the excess fabric to ½" beyond the edge of the frame, fold under the excess, and sub-staple the fabric within ¼" of the frame’s edge. Continue by sub-stapling the top of the left seam. Continue trimming, folding under, and sub-stapling around the perimeter of the chair. As you staple, check that the pattern matches the inside arms and wings.

14. As you staple the bottom, make cuts to release the fabric around the legs. Fold under the excess fabric and staple it just above the back legs.

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

13. Line up the fabric in the correct position

release cut release cut

15. Make release cuts behind and under the rolls of the arm, and then staple the fabric to the exposed wood at the front of the arm.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 199

16. When the fabric is stapled around the perimeter of the outside arms and back, replace sub-­ staples with permanent ones and trim off the excess fabric at the bottom.

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

wingback chair

200

Upholstering the Front Scrolls Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Dacron Permanent marker Scissors Fabric White or yellow chalk Goggles Pli-Grip (optional) Staple gun 3/8" staples

17. Lay a small piece of Dacron over the front scroll and use a permanent marker to trace its shape. The staples must go into wood, not padding, so be careful that the traced shape is within the wooden frame. Use the Dacron pattern to trace the shape on the fabric with chalk, then flip the pattern and trace the pieces for the other arm. Cut and staple the Dacron to both scrolls.

18. Cut ½" beyond the traced line on the fabric. Fold under the edges and staple the fabric on top of the Dacron. Keep the staples within ¼" of the folded edge. If you’re not covering your staples with tacks, attach the fabric with Pli-Grip, or see page 133 to upholster separate panels.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 200

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

Supplies Measuring tape Dustcover Scissors Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples Cardboard tack strip White or yellow chalk

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 201

19. Cut out a piece of dustcover large enough to cover the bottom of the chair with a few extra inches on every side. With the chair flipped over, staple the front edge of the dustcover to the front bottom edge of the chair. Reinforce the first stapled edge by attaching cardboard tack strip over it.

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

• • • • • • • •

wingback chair

Attaching the Dustcover to the Bottom of the Chair

201

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

wingback chair

202

20. Pull the dustcover toward the back edge of the chair to conceal the cardboard tack strip and staples. Fold under the excess dustcover and staple it down just shy of the back edge.

21. Make a release cut at each leg, fold under the excess on either side, and staple.

22. Continue folding under the edges and stapling to the bottom of the chair until the dustcover is secured all the way around. When you pull the dustcover to smooth out the wrinkles, be careful not to stretch it out.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 202

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

203

23. Hold the tack in between the thumb and index finger of your nondominant hand and hammer the head with the nylon tip of the hammer. Word to the wise: don’t bother with the magnetic side of the tack hammer. It doesn’t work for tacks with curved heads.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 203

Supplies • Decorative nailhead • Magnetic tack hammer with nylon tip

Ch. 18: Finishing the Outside of the Wingback and Applying Nailhead Trim

Our last step before making the seat cushion is covering the visible staples with decorative nailhead. Hammering in tacks is an easy but time-consuming process, so I usually pop on a movie or call a friend while I work. Two keys to success are patience and resting your piece against a solid surface. I had a difficult time getting the tacks to go into the wings of the chair until I turned the chair over and rested the wings against the solid top of the sawhorses. If the tacking surface vibrates while you hammer, it makes it nearly impossible to get the tacks to go in at all, much less straight.

wingback chair

Attaching Decorative Nailhead

24. For the most professional look, keep the heads of the nails side by side instead of overlapping or leaving small spaces between them (unless you’re intentionally spacing the tacks as a design choice). Before you know it, you’ll be back to where you started. Choosing where to put tacks is at your discretion. Just remember, they must hammer into wood.

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

Fan-tack-stic

204

There’s a wide variety of options when using decorative nailhead. Before you settle for the standard brass tack, consider these options: 1. Finish — gold, silver, rust, bronze, pink, blue (You name it, it exists.) 2. Shape — round, square, star, even your initials 3. Size — from 3⁄4" diameter for a bold statement to 1/4" for the daintiest piece 4. Spacing — continuous nailhead is the most common; space the tacks for a slight variation, or jazz up a boring piece by tacking a geometric design around the bottom edge

wingback chair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 204

Frame complete

7/9/13 12:01 PM

Chapter 19

page

205

Constructing a T-Cushion The chair is practically complete,but we still need a seat cushion before we settle in by the fireplace. I always save the cushion sewing for last. First of all, it’s nice to sit down and sew for the last task, especially since we’ve been standing for hours. Second, when complete, the cushion is the aha moment when we see the pattern come together.

Fitting the Foam to the Chair Supplies • • • • • • •

Dustcover White or yellow chalk Masking tape Scissors Permanent marker High-density foam (3"–5" thick) Electric carving knife

1. Cut out a piece of dustcover large enough to cover the deck of the chair. Place it over the deck and tuck it into the space under the arms and back. Make release cuts around the arms so the dustcover will lie flat on the surface of the deck without any wrinkles. Tape one end of a piece of chalk to protect the fabric as we trace. Keep the chalk upright and touching the insides of the chair as you trace the leftover space for the cushion. At the front edge, mark a line even with the front edge of the deck.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 205

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

wingback chair

206

2. Cut out the pattern and trace it on the foam with a permanent marker. To ensure a perfect fit, I leave the front edge a little long and retrace it when I put the foam back on the chair.

3. Use a carving knife to cut out the foam on

4. Place the foam on the chair and carefully trace the front edge and sides of the T with a permanent marker. Check the fit around the inside of the chair. The cushion should be touching but not squished against the sides. Remove the foam and make any necessary alterations.

5. As you’re working with the cushion, keep track

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 206

the line. As you cut, keep the blade of the knife straight up and down so the edges of the foam are square.

of which side is the top. T-cushions are rarely symmetrical, so we’ll want the cushion and cover to go back in the chair with topside up for the best fit. When the sides are flush all the way around, you’ve made a properly fitting cushion.

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

Supplies Cushion White or yellow chalk Fabric Scissors Square Yardstick

6. Before removing the cushion, make a mark where the back middle of the cushion meets the inside back. When we trace the cushion on the fabric, we will use this reference mark to line up the cushion with the pattern.

7. With topside up, center the cushion on the pattern and line up the back edge with the same point we marked in step 6. Trace ½" beyond the perimeter of the cushion.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 207

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

• • • • • •

wingback chair

Cutting Out the Fabric

207

8. Cut out the top face of the cushion. Lay it facedown on the same part of the pattern and trace the edges to make the bottom face of the cushion. Cut out the bottom.

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

wingback chair

208

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

9. To cut out the front boxing, lay the top piece faceup, on top of the same part of the pattern, and mark a small line along the middle of the front edge.

Top edge of seam allowance of boxing

Where seam will be for boxing and cushion

A

Seam allowance edge for cushion

10. The top edge of the front boxing is 1" above the mark made in step 9. When we traced the cushion, we made it ½" bigger on all sides for seam allowance, so when we made mark A in step 9, we were actually marking the edge of the seam

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 208

allowance. A ½" above that is where the seam will be, but we still need another ½" of seam allowance for the boxing, which makes the top edge of the boxing 1" above the original mark.

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

209 wingback chair

Extra front boxing

Top 1⁄2 zipper boxing Bottom 1⁄2 zipper boxing

11. Measure from the back left corner of the cushion, around the front, and to the back right corner (64"). Since the width of the front boxing is wider than the fabric, we’ll attach two small pieces of fabric to each end to make 64" total. The height will be 4" (3" + ½" seam allowance on top and bottom). Use the square and yardstick to draw the front boxing and two small pieces that attach to either end.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 209

Extra front boxing

12. Measure across the back of the cushion, from left to right corner, and add 10" to determine the width of the zipper boxing (27"). The height will be split into two strips that go on either side of the zipper (3"/2 = 1½"), but we’ll also need seam allowances on the top and bottom of each strip, so draw two horizontal strips 2½" tall × 27" wide. Since the zipper boxing is hidden behind the cushion, don’t worry about matching the pattern. Draw and cut out all pieces and label them on the backside.

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

Front boxing

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

wingback chair

210

Sewing the T-Cushion Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Fabric pieces for cushion Iron Zipper chain Scissors Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot Thread Hand-stapling plier or T-pins Zipper pull

13. Before sewing, press down the seam allowances on the inside edges of the zipper boxing.

14. Cut a length of zipper chain as long as the zipper boxing. With the single-welt cord foot attached, place the zipper teeth under the groove of the welt cord foot with the ironed edge of the zipper boxing over the right half of the zipper chain. Lower the sewing foot and attach the zipper boxing to the right side of the zipper.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 210

15. Starting from the end you just finished, repeat step 14 to stitch the other half of the zipper boxing to the zipper. When both sides are sewn, the fabric should meet in the middle and cover the zipper teeth.

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

211

16. With good sides facing and edges aligned, attach the additional width of fabric to one side of the front boxing. Repeat to attach the extra fabric to the other side.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 211

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

Growing up around a seamstress grandmother and mother, I remember drawers full of brightly colored zippers made to specified lengths with pulls and teeth to match. But go to the fabric store and try to buy a 70"-long zipper — they don’t exist. Upholstery zippers are rarely visible and always long, so we buy bulk zipper chain, cut it to the length we need, and slide the zipper pull on one end to make our own. They may not be as pretty, but you’ll never be caught without the right-size zipper.

wingback chair

Zip It!

17. Line up the front boxing with the front edge of the top face of the cushion and match up the pattern. Flip the boxing back while holding the matched pieces together.

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

wingback chair

212

18. Pin or staple the seam allowances together to keep the pattern matched up as you sew.

20. At corners, make small cuts in the seam allowance so the fabric will lie flat around turns. Continue sewing around the left side until you are 5" from the back left corner of the cushion.

19. Starting from the front middle, stitch the boxing to the front of the top face. Remove staples.

21. Flip the fabric over and repeat steps 19 and 20 to attach the boxing to the front and right sides of the top face.

22. Pin or staple the bottom edge of the front boxing to the bottom face. Since we’re not matching the pattern, our only concern is lining up the top and bottom corners. Start by lining up and pinning or stapling the corners, then pin or staple the fabric in between.

23. Repeat steps 19 and 20 to attach the bottom edge of the front boxing to the bottom face of the cushion.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 212

7/9/13 12:01 PM

page

213 wingback chair

ing, it should start to look like a real cushion.

26. Before we close up the cushion, attach the zipper pull to the zipper chain and unzip it several inches.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 213

25. With good sides facing and edges aligned, pin or staple the bottom middle of the zipper boxing to the back middle of the bottom face. Continue pinning or stapling until the zipper boxing is attached to the back edge, and stitch from corner to corner. Repeat to attach the top edge of the zipper boxing to the top face. Remove any pins or staples.

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

24. When you’re finished sewing the front box-

27. With good sides together, line up the ends of the front and zipper boxing. Stitch across the ends to attach them together. As you approach the zipper chain, place a small piece of doubled-over fabric on top of the teeth and sew over it. This piece of fabric will reinforce the end of the zipper so the pull doesn’t slide off. Repeat this step for the other side.

7/9/13 12:02 PM

page

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

wingback chair

214

28. The extra fabric at the end of the boxings will fold behind the front boxing, creating a pocket for the zipper pull to slide into. Fold the connected boxing ends toward the front corner of the cushion and smooth out the fabric in the fold. The zipper boxing should be straight around the back corner with the front boxing folded back on itself. Hold the boxings in place with all edges aligned, and stitch around the back corner to close up the cushion. Repeat to close the other three corners.

29. Just as we did with the arms, we’ll topstitch the cushion to reinforce the seams and hold down the seam allowance. Lay the seam flat under the sewing machine with both seam allowances under the boxing side. Stitch approximately ¼" from the seam on the boxing side all the way around the cushion. Repeat for the other seam at the perimeter of the cushion.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 214

7/9/13 12:02 PM

page

Supplies • • • •

Cushion Dacron Spray adhesive Scissors

do is wrap our cushion in Dacron. Cut a piece of Dacron large enough to wrap around all sides of the cushion. Line up the back edge of the foam with the edge of the Dacron. Lift up the foam and spray adhesive to the bottom of the cushion and to the Dacron. Wait 30 seconds for the adhesive to get tacky, and then stick the foam to the Dacron.

31. Continue gluing the Dacron to the cushion around the front and top. Trim off the excess Dacron even with the back edge of the cushion.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 215

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

30. Now that the cover is sewn, all we need to

wingback chair

Wrapping the Cushion in Dacron

215

32. Trim the Dacron even with the bottom edges of both sides. Leave the top edges long.

7/9/13 12:02 PM

page

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

wingback chair

216

33. Make a release cut in the Dacron behind the T

34. Make another release cut at the top front cor-

so the Dacron will lie over the side of the cushion.

ner and glue the Dacron around the side and back of the T.

35. Repeat steps 33 and 34 for the other side of the cushion.

36. To avoid spraying adhesive on your work surface, flip the cushion. Glue the Dacron to the side of the cushion and trim the excess off even with the bottom edge. Repeat for the other side of the cushion.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 216

37. All sides of the cushion except for the back edge should be covered in a single layer of Dacron. Leave the back edge uncovered so that the Dacron doesn’t get stuck in the zipper. Trim any other excess Dacron from the cushion. Insert the cushion in the case with the fabric and foam oriented with the topside up.

7/9/13 12:02 PM

page

217 wingback chair

the finished chair!

Ch. 19: Constructing a T-Cushion

Stealing the Show I’m always pleasantly surprised when a pattern actually comes together as planned. Although I’m rarely timid about going bold with pattern, at times even the most striking fabric is better saved for another project. Consider these factors before you create your next showstopper. 1. Size. Larger patterns are displayed well on furniture with a lot of surface area. On a chair like the Louis chair, only the dragon head would fit on the inside back, and while the head is striking, it’s far less impressive without its body. For smaller pieces, go for a smaller scale pattern or a large print with an allover abstract design instead of one main attraction. 2. Cost. On a budget? Remember that large-scale patterns require more yardage. For this

wingback, we used 12 yards of fabric when 8 would be sufficient with a small pattern or solid. A great way to go bold without going broke is to cover the inside of a piece with a solid and the outside with a pattern, or vice versa. 3. Focal point. Use pattern to draw attention to a particular part of a room or connect sev-

eral pieces of furniture by using a multicolored fabric that ties them all together, as we did in this room.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_i-217.indd 217

7/9/13 12:02 PM

Project 4

Three-Seater Tune-Up

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 218

7/9/13 12:06 PM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 219

7/9/13 12:06 PM

page

220

Chapter 20

Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric A few years ago, as I was strollingthrough the local antique mall, I came across this sofa. At the time, I was frustrated with the sofa I had. Upholstered in leather, with a deep seat and angled back, it was easy on the eyes but made for a slippery slope. My eyes had been wandering for a while, and although I didn’t need another sofa, I plopped down and sank into the sea of soft ­cushions. Sold! The next day, I removed my old sofa and brought in the tiger from the jungle, and for the last few years, it has been well loved by my household.

Living Room Plan In the design plan, the sofa is the central and most important piece in the living room. It’s the largest and only place where two or more can comfortably sit together. But while it’s most important, it’s not the only piece and needs to communicate well with the array of shapes and patterns that coexist. The clean and simple lines, substantial yet trim proportions, and comfort of my current sofa worked well with the other furniture in the room, so the main goal is to make it even more comfortable, to encourage long naps and snuggling next to the fireplace. The arms and back have flattened and hardened from decades of use, so my first priority is plumping them with new and thicker padding. Although I love the squish and crown of the down cushions, I’d like a little more support in the seat, so I’ll replace the full feather insert with down-wrapped foam. Where

three-seater sofa

Before

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 220

7/9/13 12:06 PM

page

221 three-seater sofa

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 221

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

zippers are easily hidden, there’s no need for permanent cushion covers, so I’ll also add zippers to all of the cushions to make cleaning and fluffing easier. I have a lot of patterns in the space, so I’ve chosen this fabric to introduce a mass of color and ground the room. The incredible texture of this velvety fabric reads as a solid from afar but surrounds the lounger in a plush sea of tiny poppy puffs, making it as interesting as it is comfortable. The orange highlights the streaks of orange in the wingback chair and complements the pale blue of the walls, and with a double-rub count of 27,000 and the stain resistance of the viscose polyester blend, it’s sure to stand up to a lot of use, pets, and my wine-drinking friends.

We’ll replace the old sofa fabric with the Design Connection’s Olympia in Orange.

7/9/13 12:06 PM

page

from the spruce archives

design inspiration

222 For the most impeccable upholstery job, pattern match fabric from the top all the way down to the deck.

To add a splash of color or pattern without overpowering your space, replace the front faces of sofa cushions with a showstopping print.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 222

7/9/13 12:06 PM

page

223

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 223

from the spruce archives

It’s typical to bring a new project straight from the thrift store to the workshop, but always place it in its intended space first to be sure it will fit!

design inspiration

Have a small space? Consider a two-piece sofa for more flexibility in the arrangement.

7/9/13 12:06 PM

page

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

three-seater sofa

224

Measuring for Fabric 1. To determine yardage, let’s begin by writing down all of the fabric pieces on the sofa so we don’t forget anything: • Deck and tack band • Inside arms (ISAs) • Inside back (ISB) • Outside arms (OSAs) • Outside back (OSB) • Seat cushion (SC) • Seat cushion front boxing (SCFB) • Seat cushion zipper boxing (SCZB) • Back cushions (BC) • Back cushion top boxing (BCTB) • Back cushion zipper boxing (BCZB)

inside back (behind cushions) left inside arm

back cushion

back cushion

back cushion

right inside arm

seat cushion front boxing deck tack band

left outside arm

right outside arm outside back

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 224

7/9/13 12:06 PM

page

225 three-seater sofa

3. We’ll measure the deck and tack band as one

each fabric piece. The width of the deck begins just inside the left arm and ends at the right arm (74").

piece. The front portion of the deck that’s covered with the fabric begins 4" behind the front edge of the sofa and the tack band ends at the bottom edge of the sofa (11").

4. Start where the inside arm meets the inside

5. Measure from the deck to the top of the inside

back and measure to the front edge of the sofa to get the width of the inside arm (33").

arm for the height (17").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 225

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

2. Don’t forget to measure at the largest parts of

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

three-seater sofa

226

6. The width of the inside back spans between the left and right arms (73").

7. Repeat step 5 for the height of the inside back (17").

8. The width of the outside arm is the distance

9. The height of the outside arm is from the bot-

from the front to the back of the sofa (36").

tom to the top of the sofa (23").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 226

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

227 three-seater sofa

11. Repeat step 9 for the outside back height (23").

12. Measure the widest part of the space between

13. The depth of the seat cushion is measured from the inside back to the front edge of the sofa (31").

the right and left arms for the width of the seat cushion (73").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 227

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

10. Measure the length of the sofa from right to left side to determine the width of the outside back (80").

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

three-seater sofa

228

14. Divide the width of the seat cushion by 3 to determine the width of the back cushions (24⅓").

15. I’d like the back cushions to be slightly taller than they were before, so let’s add 2" to the measurement from step 7 (19") and subtract 4" for the thickness of the seat cushion (15").

17. To determine the width of zipper boxing, add 10" to the width of the cushion.

18. We will make all cushions 4" thick, so the height for all boxings is 4".

19. In the columns to the right of Width and 16. We still need dimensions for the front, top, and zipper boxings. The width of the front and top boxings can be determined by using the following formula: front and top boxing width = width of cushion + (2 × height or depth of cushion).

Height, I’ve indicated the approximate number of inches that should be added to each measurement for pulling and stapling and/or seam allowances. Add these numbers to the measurements we took in steps 2 through 18 to determine the final width and height we will use to determine yardage. By now, you should have a feel for how much extra you’ll need for pulling, stapling, and seam allowances, but use the table below as a cheat sheet.

Sofa Measurements Fabric Piece

Width

Allowance

Final Width

Height/ Depth

Allowance

Final Height/ Depth

Deck and tack band

74"

6"

80"

11"

3"

14"

ISAs

33"

4"

37"

17"

4"

21"

ISB

73"

6"

79"

17"

4"

21"

OSAs

36"

3"

39"

23"

3"

26"

OSB

80"

3"

83"

23"

3"

26"

SC

73"

2"

75"

31"

2"

33"

SC front boxing

135"

1"

136"

4"

1"

5"

SC zipper boxing

83"

1"

84"

4"

2"

6"

BC

24⅓"

2"

26⅓"

15"

2"

17"

BC top boxing

58⅓"

1"

59⅓"

4"

1"

5"

BC zipper boxing

34⅓"

1"

35⅓"

4"

2"

6"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 228

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

229

railroaded

railroaded

deck, inside back, outside back, and seat cushion without seaming fabric together. It is not atypical to seam fabric on sofas, since many fabrics have a dominant pattern or nap that ­prevent them from being railroaded. Use your best judgment to place seams where they will be least noticeable. Though I typically follow standard procedure, as pictured below, I have run seams down the middle of sofas with an even number of seat cushions to align seams with the space between middle cushions.

up the roll

up the roll

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

The fabric for this sofa is 54" wide a nd has no repeat. I’ve also decided to railroad the fabric since there is an unnoticeable difference in pattern and nap when the direction is changed. Railroaded fabric is less common and is usually identified by the manufacturer; however, you can choose to railroad any fabric, regardless of the manufacturer’s recommendations, as long as the look and/or feel of the fabric is not undesirable when railroaded. The benefit of railroading on this piece is that we’re able to stretch the fabric across the

three-seater sofa

Railroaded Fabric

Railroaded fabric unrolls from right to left across the sofa instead of from top to bottom.

down the middle

width of fabric

Seams on a sofa may be placed down the middle, but standard construction places the full width of the fabric down the center of the sofa with smaller pieces seamed to the right and left sides.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 229

7/9/13 12:07 PM

261⁄3"

21"

261⁄3"

17" Front cushion face 351⁄3"

ing 136"

boxing

page Back 17" cushion 230 face

three-seater sofa

14"

591⁄3"

261⁄3" Back 17" cushion face

261⁄3"

79"

Back 17" cushion face

Calculating Yardage

39" 21"

Inside back

Outside arm

261⁄3" 261⁄3" When calculating yardage for a sofa,I always draw a diagram83" to visualize how the pieces lay 17" Front 17" Front cushion out oncushion the fabric. Be careful to orient the pieces correctly. With railroaded fabric, height runs from faceruns from the cut end to the fabric roll. Also, don’t forget that there selvageface to selvage and width 26" Outside back may be multiples of some of the pieces. For instance, there are two arms, and cushions need a 6"front and a back. 5" 591⁄3" 5" 80"

261⁄3" 14"

Deck 37"

261⁄3"

Back 17" cushion face

Back 17" cushion face

39" Outside arm

261⁄3" Back 17" cushion face

37"

ISA

21"

ISA

21"

351⁄3" 351⁄3" Back cushion zipper boxing Seat cushion front boxing 136" 591⁄3" Back cushion top boxing

Seat cushion zipper boxing 84"

17" Front cushion face 351⁄3"

261⁄3"

261⁄3" 17" Front cushion face

17" Front cushion face

6" 5"

591⁄3"

591⁄3"

6"

75"

Seat cushion face

261⁄3"

75"

33"

Seat cushion face

33"

continued from facing page

Seat cushion zipper boxing 84"

6"

75"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 230

Seat cushion face

7/9/13 12:07 PM

33"

page

231 three-seater sofa

39"

Inside back

21"

Outside arm

26"

83"

one continuous piece; continues below

39" Outside back

26" Outside arm

26"

5"

20. Draw a long rectangle to illustrate the boundaries of the fabric.

21. Roughly draw out the pieces on the fabric,

Ch. 20: Determining Yardage for Railroaded Fabric

79"

24. Divide the total number by 36" (11.97). This number equals the number of yards, but let’s add an additional 2 yards for welt cord and any other variances that may come up during the upholstery process, so we’ll need 14 yards total.

stacking them until their heights add up to 54".

22. As you draw, label the pieces so you can easily see which ones have been accounted for and write measurements for width and height on every piece.

Even the most experienced upholsterers make mistakes, so always order extra yardage in case a step goes awry. If you have leftovers, make some throw pillows (see chapter 30), save for a rainy day, or donate to a local elementary school for craft projects.

23. After you’ve drawn everything, add the dimensions of the largest side-by-side widths (80" + 26⅓" + 26⅓" + 26⅓" + 83" + 39" + 75" + 75" = 431"). 6" 75"

33"

Seat cushion face

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 231

33"

7/9/13 12:07 PM

OVERVIEW

Supplies for the Sofa

Basic supplies

Materials

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3/8" staples 1/2" staples 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Button twine Hand-sewing twine Painter’s or masking tape Paper Pencil Permanent marker Spray adhesive Spring twine Thread T-pins White or yellow chalk

Tools & equipment

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Air blower Button needle (optional) Calculator Electric carving knife Goggles Hand-stapling plier and staples (optional) Inexpensive scissors Iron Klinch-It with Klinch-It staples (optional) Large curved needle Magnetic tack hammer Measuring tape Pliers Regulator Rubber mallet Ruler Scissors Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot Square Square-point upholstery knife Staple gun Staple remover Webbing stretcher Welt cord stick (optional) Yardstick

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 232

44 yards 5/32" fiber flex welt cord 14 yards fabric 1 slab 2"-thick low-density foam Back cushion padding 10 yards burlap Cardboard tack strip 8 yards cotton batting 10 yards Dacron 21/2 yards decking material Down wraps (optional) 21/2 yards dustcover 2 yards 11/2" edge roll 55 yards jute webbing 3 slabs 1"–2"-thick low-density foam 4 yards Pli-Grip 9 yards small edge roll or leftover sewn welt cord • 5 yards zipper chain • 4 zipper pulls For more information on tools and materials, visit the glossary (page 369).

7/9/13 12:07 PM

Chapter 21

page

233

Spring Tying with an Edge Wire What a mess I foundwhen stripping this sofa! Solidified foam that crumbled to dust and lots of goodies saved in the crevices from past owners. It’s hard to believe I’ve been sitting and lying on this piece for over a year! I’ve removed all of the padding, staples, tacks, and fabric and am moving on with a fresh, clean frame (see Stripping Furniture, page 353). One reason why this sofa is so comfortable is because of the coil springs in the seat. If you’ve read through projects 1 and 3, you’re well acquainted with coils. This sofa will be a true test of our spring-tying skills as we tie a larger number of springs with an edge wire. Edge wire is exactly what it sounds like: wire that connects to a system of coil springs and creates an edge. Most of the time, edge wire forms the front edge of the deck. Other times, the wire creates an edge all the way around the deck, which is what we have with this sofa. Since the springs around the edge of the piece attach to the edge wire, we’ll use extra care to ensure the wire, when secured, is resting at the desired height and location of the edge. If you have coil springs with no edge wire, see pages 148–154 for spring tying. For zigzag or sinuous springs, see pages 82–85. Then skip to chapter 22. Otherwise, attach webbing, burlap, and edge roll to the top edge of the frame and skip to chapter 22, step 17. three-seater sofa

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 233

Stripped to the frame

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

three-seater sofa

234

Attaching Webbing Supplies • • • • • • • •

Goggles Jute webbing Staple gun 1/2" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Magnetic tack hammer 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks

1. With the sofa flipped upside down, use the width of your hands to determine how many strips of webbing fit across the long side of the frame. The goal is to attach the maximum number of strips without overlapping. Evenly distribute the webbing so that any space between strips is consistent all the way across. Skip over areas already supported by wooden beams.

2. Starting at one end of the sofa, staple the first side of the first strip of webbing approximately 4" from the cut end. Use four or five staples to secure it to the bottom edge of the frame. Staple at the center of the wooden beam where it’s strongest, fold over the excess 4", and staple again.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 234

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

235 three-seater sofa

bing (while still attached to the roll) to the opposite side of the sofa frame and drape it over the teeth of the webbing stretcher. Leverage the webbing stretcher against the side of the frame and slowly pull the handle down until the webbing is taut, then staple. Cut off the excess, leaving a 2"–4" tail, fold back the excess, and staple again. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you’ve secured all strips of webbing to the long sides of the sofa.

4. For the horizontal strips of webbing, weave them over, under, over each strip of vertical webbing until reaching the other side. Then repeat steps 2 and 3. Attach all horizontal strips and alternate the weaving pattern with each new piece of webbing.

Ch. 21: Spring Tying with an Edge Wire

3. Once the first side is stapled, bring the web-

5. When webbing is stapled to all four sides of the sofa frame, fold the webbing in half lengthwise, and staple it across the vertical wooden braces on the bottom of the frame. If legs get in the way of using the webbing stretcher, stretch the webbing as tightly as you can by hand. These webbing strips will help prevent sagging over time, so attach staples all the way down the webbing instead of just at the ends.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 235

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

236

Ch. 21: Spring Tying with an Edge Wire

three-seater sofa

Spitting Tacks Before staple guns, upholsterers held tacks in their mouths and spit them onto the end of the tack hammer while they worked. Many upholsterers bore war wounds from bringing the hammer back with the tack still attached. Ouch!

6. Use the magnetic tack hammer to nail three upholstery tacks into every stapled end of webbing and all across the wooden braces. Place each tack on the magnetic tip with your nondominant hand then tap the tack into the wood. Flip the hammer over to hammer the tack in all the way. Always keep your index finger on top of the hammer for added control.

Attaching Springs and Spring Twine I kept the old springs from the sofa, since they are in good condition, and left them attached to the edge wire. Before getting started with spring tying, take a look at the shape of the springs. Many times, springs will have a bent or bound end on the topside, which prevents the spring from poking through the padding. Orient the top end of every spring the same direction. If you’re reusing springs, they may be warped from years of compression in a certain direction. In this case, position the bent springs so they curve to the front of the sofa and match the other springs to this orientation.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 236

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • •

Coil springs Klinch-It and staples Pliers Button needle (optional) Button twine (optional) Scissors Goggles Magnetic tack hammer 10-ounce or 12-ounce upholstery tacks Spring twine Staple gun 1/2" staples

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

237 three-seater sofa

8. Once the springs are in position, place the Klinch-It staple around the bottom rung of each spring and compress the handle to secure the staple in place. Attach each spring to the webbing in two or three evenly spaced locations around the bottom rung. Use pliers to remove any Klinch-It staples that are not tightly attached to the webbing and restaple. If you don’t have a Klinch-It, see pages 32–34 for instructions on hand-sewing springs to webbing.

9. After securing all the springs to the webbing,

10. Double over spring twine and stretch it across a row of springs from one pair of tacks to the other. Add 4" of twine for every spring in the row, so add 16" of twine for the vertical rows of 4 springs and 48" for the horizontal rows of 12 springs. Measure and cut twine for every vertical and horizontal row of springs.

use the magnetic tack hammer to place two tacks, approximately ½" apart, at both ends of every vertical and horizontal row of springs. Hammer these tacks in halfway.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 237

Ch. 21: Spring Tying with an Edge Wire

7. Flip the sofa upright and evenly space the springs in vertical and horizontal rows on top of the webbing. The tops of these springs are bound, so I’ll orient all springs with bound side up and the top end in the direction of 5 o’clock on every spring. Before securing the springs to the webbing, double-check the edge wire to make sure it’s evenly spaced within the sofa frame and lines up with the desired edge when compressed.

7/9/13 12:07 PM

three-seater sofa

11. With the twine still doubled over, place the middle loop in between a pair of tacks on the backside of the frame. Make a loop over each tack, pull the ends of twine tightly toward the springs, and hammer down the tacks. Repeat this for all pairs of tacks on the back and one side of the frame.

Tying Vertical AND HORIZONTAL Rows Coil springs provide the most supportand are most comfortable when the top rung is centered over the bottom rung. On a deck like this, our objective is to compress the springs as much as possible, keep them centered on their vertical axes, and create a flat surface for the seat cushion. We’ll also watch the edge wire carefully to ensure it stays centered within the frame and lined up with the front edge at the appropriate height.

12. Starting with the middle, vertical row of springs, grab the left twine and pull it under the second rung and up through the middle of the center back spring.

13. Make a loop around the backside of the second rung to form a loose knot.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 238

7/9/13 12:07 PM

page

239 three-seater sofa

15. Now release the twine with your dominant

tightly from the tack. Place your nondominant hand around the spring to push it down and back into the desired position. When the spring is in place, use the index finger of your nondominant hand to hold the spring twine against the bottom of the second rung.

hand, grab the end, and pull until the knot is tight.

16. Bring the end of the spring twine under the

18. Grab the front spring and pull it down and

top rung on the other side of the spring and repeat steps 13–15 to tie another knot.

toward the front of the sofa, using the sofa frame to leverage your hand. With your other hand, wind the spring twine around the left tack and pull out the slack as you lower the springs. When the edge wire is lined up with the front edge of the frame and the springs are compressed as tightly as possible, let go of the springs and hammer down the tack all the way.

17. Tie knots to the top rung of both sides of every spring until you reach the last side of the last spring. Then skip back down to the second rung and make a knot.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 239

Ch. 21: Spring Tying with an Edge Wire

14. With your dominant hand, pull the twine

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

19. Double-check the positioning of the springs before moving on. Are the springs centered over their central axes? Do the springs only compress 1"–2" with strong pressure? When you pull the edge wire down to the height of the springs, is it lined up with the front of the frame? If you answered “no” to any of these questions, go back and retie some or all of the springs until the answers are yes.

Ch. 21: Spring Tying with an Edge Wire

three-seater sofa

240

20. When you’re satisfied with the placement and tightness of the springs, reinforce the spring twine with a few additional staples and cut off the excess twine.

21. Take the right length of twine, pull it under the second rung, and make a knot around the second and top rung to tie them tightly together.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 240

22. Continue tying knots to the top rung of both sides of every spring. At the end of the row, wrap the spring twine around the right tack and pull out the slack with your nondominant hand. Squat down and watch the height of the edge wire as you pull out the slack in the twine. When the edge wire is at the same height as the springs, release the twine and hammer down the right tack. Repeat step 20 before moving on to the next row.

7/9/13 12:08 PM

Don’t stop! I know you’re tempted to take a break and come back to spring tying later, but your hands will feel much better if you complete all the spring tying at one time. If you start to get blisters, attach medical tape around sore spots on your fingers and power through.

23. Continue tying all the vertical rows, working from the middle out. Match the heights of the springs and edge wire from row to row.

24. The objectives with horizontal rows are to keep the edge wire centered within the frame, to stabilize the springs in an upright position, and to help compress the springs even more. Keeping these goals in mind, repeat steps 12–23 to tie the horizontal rows. Since we’re not lining up the edge wire with an edge, just keep an eye on the space between the frame and the edge wire and keep it centered between the left and right sides.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 241

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

three-seater sofa

242

Tying Diagonal Rows Now that we’ve tied the verticaland horizontal rows, the springs should be in the desired position and stable enough to resist movement when pulled in one direction or the other. To complete an eight-way tie, we’ll tie the springs diagonally in both directions, adding extra stability and creating a solid unit

of springs. If your springs are leaning slightly to the right after vertical and horizontal tying, tie the diagonal rows toward the left first to straighten them out (or vice versa). If your springs are perfectly centered, it doesn’t matter which way you tie first.

25. Place two tacks at both ends of every diagonal row. Angle the pair of tacks so they are perpendicular to the line we create with the spring twine. If you are unable to place the tacks at the center of a diagonal row because the frame or other tacks are in the way, place the tacks in the closest available space. Repeat steps 10 and 11 to measure and attach lengths of spring twine, then repeat step 24 to tie the diagonal rows toward the front of the sofa in both directions. MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

You just completed the most difficult type of spring tying! I know how laborious it is to tie a sofa’s worth of springs together, especially with an edge wire. Even with years of experience, I often have to undo and retie rows to correct spring and edge wire placement, so don’t be discouraged if you find yourself backtracking here and there. Now, bandage up those blisters, and let’s move on to the fabric. MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 242

7/9/13 12:08 PM

Chapter 22

page

243

Padding a Straight Deck The journey to padding and upholsteringthe deck is often a long and labor-intensive process. There are hours of stripping, being covered from head to toe in dirt and dust, sweating, and flexing muscles. And then there’s the marathon of spring tying. Fear not: You’ve already wrestled your way through the backbreaking work. Now it’s time for padding, fabric, and seeing the sofa come back to life. Since the cushion will do most of the work keeping the seat comfortable, we’ll apply a light layer of padding on the deck, as opposed to the thick padding we attached to the seats in projects 1 and 2.

Covering the Springs with Burlap Supplies • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Burlap Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Permanent marker

1. First, we’ll cover the springs with burlap so the padding doesn’t squish through. Measure across the springs from the back to the front tacks to get the depth of the burlap.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 243

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

three-seater sofa

244

2. Measure from the tacks on the left to the ones on the right side to determine the width of the burlap. Add 4" to the depth and width for pulling and stapling, and then cut out a piece to these dimensions.

4. After stapling the front middle, pull the burlap tightly to the back middle. Since I have a wooden post in the way of my burlap, I’ll make a Y-cut to release the burlap around it (see page 44 for release cut instructions).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 244

3. Center the burlap over the springs and staple the front middle, being careful to avoid tacks as you staple. Staples should be placed around the seat on the top face of the frame where we attached the tacks for spring tying. Tacks deflect staples, so staple around them to avoid flying metal and sparks.

5. Fold under the burlap on either side of the post and staple. When the front and back middles are secured, staple the middles of the right and left sides.

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

245 three-seater sofa

7. Trim the excess burlap to 2", fold back, and staple again.

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

6. Staple the rest of the front, back, left, and right sides (in that order). As you staple, make cuts to release the burlap around wooden posts that are in the way.

Attaching Edge Roll The firm yet forgiving density ofedge roll keeps padding from breaking down and wearing out quickly, so we’ll attach it to the front edge of the deck where there’s constant pressure from sitting and standing. On sofa decks, I prefer a larger 1" edge roll, which helps build up the height of the front edge to keep the cushion in place. If you tied springs without an edge wire, staple the edge roll to the frame and skip to step 17 (see Attaching Edge Roll, pages 45–46 and 157–158).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 245

Supplies • • • • • •

1" edge roll Permanent marker Square-point upholstery knife Large curved needle Button twine Scissors

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

three-seater sofa

246

8. Butt the cut end of the 1" edge roll into the left arm and stretch it across the front edge of the sofa. Make a mark 1" from the right arm with the permanent marker.

10. Line up the edge roll with the front edge of the deck ½" from the left arm. The flatter side of the edge roll should be resting on the burlap with the tail extending into the sofa. (See Attaching Edge Roll, page 45.)

9. Use the square-point upholstery knife to cut all the way through the edge roll on the marked line.

12. Pull out the needle and twine just beneath the edge wire and remove the needle. Shorten the twine under the edge wire to about 6" and hold it in your left hand. Hold the longer strand in your right hand. Put the left strand of button twine under the right strand.

11. First, we need to anchor the edge roll to the edge wire. Thread the curved needle with approximately 36" of button twine and insert the needle behind the edge roll through the tail. Start on the side of the sofa that is opposite your dominant hand.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 246

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

247 three-seater sofa

14. To complete the slipknot, bring the left strand

strand and itself.

behind itself and through the loose knot, then tighten. Pull the right strand to tighten the button twine around the edge roll until it’s held firmly in place against the edge wire. Tie two knots in the button twine to keep the slipknot from loosening.

15. To hand-sew the edge roll to the front edge

16. To keep the button twine from loosening,

of the deck, rethread the curved needle with the long strand of twine and insert it behind the edge roll and through the tail, approximately 1½" to the right of the first loop. Pull out the needle and twine just beneath the edge wire, but above the twine coming from the slipknot. Tighten the loop while holding the edge roll even with the front edge of the deck.

keep the thumb of your nondominant hand on the stitch as you sew. Repeat step 15 until you have 6" of button twine remaining, tie it off with a knot, and start a new line. Continue sewing until you reach the other arm, and then tie off the end of the edge roll with a knot to finish sewing.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 247

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

13. Bring the left strand up and over the right

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

three-seater sofa

248

Marking and Measuring the Deck Supplies • • • • • •

Ruler Permanent marker Yardstick Measuring tape Pencil Paper

17. Measure 4" behind the front edge of the edge roll and mark a line all the way across the deck. This will be the division between the front and back parts of the deck.

18. Before we pad the deck, let’s take a few measurements for the fabric. The front of the deck will be covered in the orange fabric. Measure from the marked line to the top of the wooden frame (8") and then add 5" to accommodate for sewing, padding, pulling, and stapling (13"). We’ll attach a tack band at the top of the wooden frame that will cover the part below the deck.

19. Measure from one end of the edge roll to the other to determine the distance between the front two corners of the deck (75"). Then add an extra 9" for wrapping the corners in fabric (84").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 248

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

249 three-seater sofa

20. We’ll use a beige decking material to cover the deck behind the line, so measure from the line to the tacks on the backside of the frame (32") and add 3" for sewing, padding, pulling, and stapling. Use the measurement from step 19 to determine the width of the decking material (84"). Write down your measurements and set them aside for later.

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

Padding the Deck Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Cotton batting Dacron Scissors Hand-sewing twine Large curved needle Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples T-pins

21. Use small pieces of cotton to fill in and around any dips or high spots in the surface of the deck. Then place one layer of cotton batting over the burlap, starting 1" behind the marked line from step 17. Use your hands to tear off the cotton just shy of where we stapled the burlap.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 249

7/9/13 12:08 PM

page

250

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

three-seater sofa

22. Use the measurements from step 20 to cut a piece of Dacron that covers the cotton batting. You’ll sew the Dacron to the deck along the drawn line using the curved needle and handsewing twine. Start by tying a slipknot through the Dacron and burlap where the marked line meets the inside of the left arm (see steps 18–21, page 161). Once the twine is anchored, use the same stitch from the wingback deck to attach the Dacron to the burlap every 2"–3" (see steps 22 and 23, page 162). Once the Dacron is sewn all the way across the marked line, staple down the back and sides, performing release cuts, as necessary, to get the Dacron to lie flat around wooden posts.

23. Use the measurements from steps 18 and

24. Starting with the front left corner, repeat step

19 to cut a piece of Dacron for the front portion of the deck. Center the Dacron on the deck and pin in place on the other side of the marked line. Wrap the Dacron around the front corners, pin, and trim off the excess in the corners.

22 to close the front corners and stitch the Dacron along the front side of the marked line. Only stitch the Dacron to the burlap along the marked line. Stitch the corners shut without sewing them to the deck and remove the T-pins.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 250

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

251 three-seater sofa

26. Place another layer of cotton over the entire

27. Tightly pull the Dacron forward over the cot-

28. Trim the Dacron on all four sides as close to the staples as possible. Deck padding is complete.

ton and staple right above where the tack band begins. (Since my tack band starts at the top of the wooden beam, I have no choice but to staple the Dacron in the same place.) As you staple, split the Dacron layers in half and staple only the bottom layer. The top layer will cover the indentations made by the staples. Perform release cuts, so the Dacron lies flat around the inside arm posts. Then staple down the sides of the Dacron on the front part of the deck.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 251

front portion of the deck, stopping 1" shy of where the tack band begins.

Ch. 22: Padding a Straight Deck

25. After sewing, flip the Dacron back and fill the dip behind the edge roll with two layers of cotton batting.

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

252

Chapter 23

Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band As we’ve seen with the wingback and sofa,there are many types of decks. There are T-decks, straight decks, boxed decks, curved decks, pleated decks, and more. Knowing how to do the two decks in this book will give you the skills to upholster the most common types. If you come across a deck that’s slightly different, pay attention to the construction as you take it apart. Save the fabric and even the padding as a reference for putting it back together. Remember the basic order of operations applies to all projects, regardless of styling.

Spruce it up. It’s standard to use a beige decking material behind the line, but it’s also fun to spice it up with a splash of magenta or wild floral for a little surprise when you lift up the cushion.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 252

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

253 three-seater sofa

Cutting and Sewing the Deck The orange fabric covers the frontof the sofa and wraps around the front two corners of the deck. The distance from corner to corner is 75". We already know it’s 4" from the marked line to the front edge of the deck, but we’ll add ½" for seam allowance to make it 4½". To make the 90-degree turn at each corner, we’ll cut out right angles in the fabric and sew edges A and B together. To complete the deck, we’ll sew edge C to the beige decking material.

Supplies Fabric White or yellow chalk Air blower Square Yardstick Scissors Decking material T-pins or hand-stapling plier and staples • Sewing machine • Thread

Ch. 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band

• • • • • • • •

½" seam allowance

B A

4"

C

B A 4"

measurement from corner to corner 75" C

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 253

C

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

Ch. 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band

three-seater sofa

254

1. Do a chalk test (see page 371) to determine which color chalk, white or yellow, comes out easier and draw the pattern on page 253 on the fabric. Use a yardstick and square to keep lines straight, square, and lined up with the grain of the fabric. Cut out the fabric and cut a piece of decking material using the measurements found in step 20 (page 249).

2. With good sides facing and edges aligned,

3. Center and align the top edge of the deck with the front edge of the decking material (good sides facing) and use the hand-stapling plier or T-pins to hold the pieces together. Stitch edge C to the decking material from the center of the deck toward one side.

4. As you stitch over the seams made in step 2, lay open the seam allowances and stitch them flat. When you reach the end, disconnect the thread from the machine, flip the deck over, and go back to the middle. Continue sewing until you reach the other side of the deck and remove any T-pins or staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 254

stitch edges A and B together to make the front corners.

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

Supplies Sewn fabric for deck T-pins Large curved needle Button twine Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples White or yellow chalk Staple remover Pliers

5. With the seam allowance toward the front portion of the deck and the rest of the fabric lying on the back portion of the deck, center the deck fabric on the sofa with the sewn line lined up with the line marked on the burlap. Be sure the fabric for the front portion is on top, and then pin the deck to the marked line.

6. Using the curved needle and button twine, anchor the seam allowance just inside the left arm with a slipknot (pages 246–247, steps 11–14). The button twine should be long enough to reach all the way across the sofa with an extra 15"–20". Pull the short strand of button twine to the outside of the left arm and staple tightly in place.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 255

Ch. 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band

• • • • • • • • • • •

three-seater sofa

Attaching the Deck Fabric to the Chair

255

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

three-seater sofa

256

7. Pull the long strand of button twine tightly across the deck and make a tight knot around the seam allowance and burlap where the line meets the right inside arm. Pull the excess button twine under the right arm and staple to the frame. This tight pop line should be very close to, if not on top of, the sewn line in the fabric. We’ll hand-sew the fabric around the pop line to anchor the fabric tightly to the sofa.

8. Repeat step 6 to start a new length of button twine. Thread the curved needle with the twine and insert it right next to the slipknot. Bring the needle out a few inches to the right of the entrance point and approximately ¼" away from the pop line on the seam allowance side. Insert the needle right next to this point on the other side of the pop line. Be sure your stitch always goes through the seam allowance and pull the twine tightly after every stitch. Continue sewing until you reach the other arm, tie off your thread with a knot, staple the tail to the outside of the right arm, and remove the T-pins.

9. Now that the fabric is sewn to the sofa, pull the decking material tightly to the back middle of the sofa and make cuts to release the fabric around any posts in the frame. Precision is key when performing cuts in fabric, so always draw your cut in chalk first and cut slowly until it’s perfect. After every cut, staple the fabric on either side of the frame, and then staple to the next post. Keep cutting and stapling until the back and sides of the decking material are attached all the way around.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 256

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

257 three-seater sofa

11. It can be tricky to determine where the release cuts should go at the front of the arms. Smooth the fabric toward the left arm and pull it tightly down and around the front corner. As you pull, use your fingers to feel the edges of the front arm post and mark the fabric at the tips of your fingers with chalk.

When do I use a tack band? Tack bands frequently appear on decks with an edge wire to break up the broad expanse of fabric extending from the top of the deck to the bottom of the frame. Using a tack band is primarily a styling choice and works well to give definition to an area that is otherwise plain, but ultimately, you decide when it enhances a piece of furniture.

Ch. 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band

10. Measure and mark a line on the wooden frame where the top of the tack band will go. With the palm of your hand, smooth the fabric forward for the front of the deck and sub-staple approximately ½" below the marked line. Work your way out from the middle, smoothing and sub-stapling, until you’re 6" from each arm.

12. Perform a Y-cut to release the fabric around the arm post and continue sub-stapling the fabric to the front of the sofa and behind the arm post.

13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for the right side. When you have sub-stapled all the way across and are happy with the tightness and smoothness of the fabric, replace the sub-staples with permanent staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 257

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

Ch. 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band

three-seater sofa

258

Sewing and Attaching the Tack Band Supplies • • • • • • • •

Ruler White or yellow chalk Yardstick Square Fabric Scissors Welt cord stick (optional) 5/32" fiber flex welt cord

14. Measure and mark a straight line in chalk where the top of the tack band will be placed.

• • • • • • • •

Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot Thread Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Cardboard tack strip Dacron

16. Draw, cut out, and stitch single welt cord the same length as the width of the tack band (see Sewing Tips and Tricks, page 364, for single welt cord instructions).

15. Measure the height (3") and width (75") of the area covered by the tack band and add 5" to each dimension for sewing, pulling, and stapling (8" tall × 80" wide). Use a yardstick and square to draw the tack band on the fabric in chalk. Then cut out the piece of fabric.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 258

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

259 three-seater sofa

18. Center the tack band on the sofa and line

sewing machine, lay the welt cord on top of the tack band fabric with the edge of its tail lined up with the top edge of the tack band fabric. From one end to the other, stitch along the right side of the welt cord and attach it to the fabric.

up the top of the cording with the marked line. While holding the welt cord and seam allowances against the sofa, flip the fabric up with the wrong side facing you. Staple the seam allowances all the way across the sofa until you are 1" from the arms. Continue checking the welt cord to make sure it’s lined up with the marked line.

19. Cut open the seam on the welt cord fabric and expose the cording inside. Trim off only the excess cording (not the fabric) even with the inside of the left arm. Fold the fabric back together and continue stapling the rest of the tack band down. Repeat this step for the right side.

20. Tightly push cardboard tack strip up and into

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 259

Ch. 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band

17. With the single-welt cord foot installed on the

the welt cord and staple it all the way across.

7/9/13 12:09 PM

page

Ch. 23: Sewing and Attaching the Deck Fabric and Tack Band

three-seater sofa

260

21. Split and staple Dacron to the tack band from the top of the cardboard tack strip all the way to the bottom edge of the sofa. Trim excess Dacron from the bottom.

three-seater sofa

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 260

22. Smooth the fabric down with the palm of your hand and staple to the bottom of the sofa. Work from the middle out to the sides.

Deck complete

7/9/13 12:09 PM

Deck Defense We have a lot left to do, so take care of the deck we’ve worked so hard to upholster. It’s natural to lay tools on the deck as you work on other parts of the sofa, but before you do, protect it from dirt and damage with a clean scrap of Dacron or fabric.

23. When the fabric is stapled all across the bottom, smooth and staple the sides to the front of the arms and trim off the excess.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 261

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

262

Chapter 24

Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms We’ve restructured the seat,padded and upholstered the deck, and are finally getting a little glimpse of the sofa’s new look. Rest assured, it’s all downhill from here, and we’ll be fluffing cushions and sitting pretty before we know it. From now on, each subsequent chapter gets easier and easier. Our next task is padding and constructing boxed arms. You may remember from the wingback project that our inside arms attached first, followed by the inside back, and then the outside arms and back. Although it’s standard procedure to upholster the inside and outside arms independently, there are always exceptions to the rule, this sofa being one of them. Because these arms are so boxy, we’ll pad and upholster each arm as one unit instead of breaking them into insides and outsides. We’ll sew the arm fabric together so it slips over the entire arm at once, and when we go to close up the outside of the sofa, we’ll skip straight to the outside back instead of stopping to upholster each outside arm independently.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 262

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

Supplies Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Measuring tape Burlap White or yellow chalk

1. Staple and stretch jute webbing horizontally across the inside arms. Since we don’t rest much weight on the inside arms, it’s only necessary to attach a few strips of webbing instead of covering the entire opening like we did with the seat. Repeat this step for the outside arms (see chapter 21, Attaching Webbing).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 263

At the back of the inside arms, staple the webbing, burlap, and fabric inside the space between the arms and inside back. At the bottom of the arms, attach burlap to the wood, but pull through and staple fabric under the arm. If necessary, staple to the outside of the sofa frame, but reserve this only for desperate situations, as a buildup of several layers will make lumps under the fabric.

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

• • • • • • • • •

three-seater sofa

Attaching Webbing and Burlap to the Arms

263

2. Staple burlap over the inside arm. Make release cuts in the burlap, so it will lie flat around posts. Fold back and staple again for extra reinforcement. Repeat this step for the outside arms but leave the bottom 10" of burlap unstapled, so you can access the space beneath the arms to staple fabric.

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

three-seater sofa

264

Padding the Arms Supplies • Small edge roll or leftover sewn welt cord • Goggles • Staple gun • 3/8" staples • Scissors • 1"–2"-thick low-density foam • Permanent marker • Electric carving knife • Cotton batting • Spray adhesive • Dacron 3. Since the top and front edges of the arm are sharp, hard, and get a lot of wear and tear, we’ll attach edge roll to these edges to prevent our padding from wearing out quickly. With a space this small, I often use leftover welt cord in place of edge roll. Line up the edge roll or leftover welt cord with the edge of the frame and staple through the tail to attach it to the arm.

4. We’ll only attach foam to the tops and insides of the arms. The rest of the arms will be covered in Dacron. To maintain the boxy shape, I have chosen thin 1" super-soft foam. Drape the foam over the arm and squish it into the space between the inside arm and back and under the arm to hold it in place while you trace the arm.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 264

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

265 three-seater sofa

6. Remove the foam from the sofa and use the

it meets the inside back. As you approach the top of the arm, shape the foam around the frame and draw a line where the top of the arm meets the back edge of the sofa. If you’re having trouble getting the foam to stay in place, perform a release cut with scissors at the top back of the arm. Then draw your line for the top of the arm.

carving knife to cut on the drawn line.

7. Before you attach the foam, staple a layer of

8. Line up the foam with the edges of the arm. Place the nose of the stapler into the side of the foam and staple between the top and bottom faces. The top face of the foam will cover the indentations made by the staples. Be careful not to expose the wooden edges of the arm by pushing the foam back as you staple. The foam should cover or go slightly past the edges when stapled.

c­ otton to the top and front of the arm to fill in the dip created by the welt cord.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 265

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

5. At the back of the arm, mark the foam where

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

three-seater sofa

266

9. Cut a piece of Dacron large enough to cover

10. Make release cuts in the Dacron around the

the entire arm (inside, top, outside, and front) with 6" extra at the bottom. Tuck the bottom of the Dacron under the inside arm. When you tuck it under, make sure you have enough Dacron to wrap around the front of the arm all the way down to the bottom of the sofa. Lay the Dacron back on the deck and spray adhesive on the inside and top of the arm and halfway up the Dacron. Pull the Dacron up and over the arm and stick it to the inside and top arm.

posts at the front and back of the inside arm, and then pull the Dacron through the space under and around the front of the arm. Split and staple the bottom layer of the Dacron to the front of the arm on top of the cotton.

11. At the back of the arm, the Dacron should be trimmed to meet the inside back. The Dacron should also cover the top of the arm all the way to the back edge of the sofa.

12. On the outside arm, there’s a horizontal sup-

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 266

port just above the pull-through space. Pull the Dacron tightly over the arm and staple to this horizontal support. Since these staples are so far from the cut edge of the Dacron, there’s no need to split and staple.

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

267 three-seater sofa

14. When the Dacron is attached to the front, top, inside, and outside of the arm, trim off the excess Dacron around the edges.

Cutting and Sewing Boxed Arms

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

13. Pull the Dacron tightly and split and staple the bottom layer to the right and left sides above the horizontal support on the outside arm.

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Pencil Paper Fabric Square White or yellow chalk Yardstick Welt cord stick (optional) Scissors 5/32" fiber flex welt cord T-pins or hand-stapling plier and staples Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot Thread

15. Let’s write down the dimensions of the arms, so we can cut and sew them together. Measure from the back to the front of the arm (36") and add 3" for sewing, pulling, and stapling (39").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 267

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

16. Measure from the top to the bottom of the arm (23") and add 3" for pulling and stapling (26").

17. Slightly compress the padding with the palm of your hands and measure the thickness of the arm (3½"). Add 1" for seam allowance (4½").

41⁄2"

Inside arm

39"

26"

39" Front arm boxing

Top arm boxing

Front arm boxing

39"

39" Top arm boxing

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

three-seater sofa

268

Inside arm

Outside arm

26"

39"

26"

Outside arm

26"

41⁄2" 18. It’s far more efficient to sew both arms at the

19. Add the width and height of the inside arm

same time, so draw the pieces for both arms on the fabric and cut them out. Be sure to correctly orient the pieces on the fabric and use a straight edge and square to keep the corners square and edges straight with the grain of the fabric.

piece (65") and multiply by 4 (260") to determine the total length of welt cord needed for both boxed arms. Draw, cut out, and stitch single welt cord (see page 364 for single welt cord instructions).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 268

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

269 three-seater sofa

top edge of the arm. Stitch along the right side of the cording to attach it to the front face of the top and front edges of the inside arm piece. As you approach the front corner, make a small release cut in the welt cord tail.

21. Bend the cording 90 degrees to follow the shape of the inside arm and hold in place as you continue sewing.

22. Right before the needle reaches the corner,

24. With good sides facing, seam together the

stop, lift the sewing foot, and pivot the fabric 45 degrees. Lower the foot and walk the needle by hand diagonally across the corner (3–4 stitches). When you get across the corner, lift the foot, pivot the fabric another 45 degrees, and continue sewing along the next side. When you reach the end, disconnect your thread and cut off the excess welt cord.

front edge of the top arm and top edge of the front arm.

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

20. Line up the edge of the welt cord tail with the

23. Repeat steps 20–22 for all four inside and outside arms.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 269

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

three-seater sofa

270

25. Line up the seam from step 24 with the front corner of the inside arm. Use T-pins or the handstapling plier to hold the fabric together as you sew. With good sides facing and edges aligned, stitch the front arm fabric to the front of the inside arm from the corner down. Go back to the corner, flip over the fabric, and stitch the top arm fabric to the top of the inside arm.

26. Repeat step 25 to attach the outside arm to the other side of the top and front arm pieces. Repeat steps 25 and 26 to stitch together the other arm. After you’ve finished both arms, check the fit and inspect the seams, tightening any areas that need attention by sewing over them again.

Clean Seams A good sewing job is free of pleating and puckering at the seam. If you’re having a hard time making smooth seams, try the following tips: 1. Use a small piece of the fabric to check the tension of your sewing machine and make adjustments as needed. 2. Pull the fabric tightly from top to bottom as you run it through your sewing machine. 3. Try using hard welt cord instead of fiber flex welt cord. See Sewing Tips and Tricks (page 358) for more sewing tips.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 270

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

Supplies Sewn arms White or yellow chalk Scissors Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Staple remover Pliers

27. Drape the sewn fabric over the arm and pull it into position. When you have the lines of the welt cord lined up with the edges of the arm and the corner tight to the frame, push down in between the deck and inside arm and find the corners of the front post. Use your fingers to determine where the tips of the Y-cut should be and mark the fabric.

28. Pull out the fabric and use the marks made in step 27 to draw and cut the Y. Push the fabric down between the inside arm and deck and tightly sub-staple the bottom of the front arm to the bottom of the sofa frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 271

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

• • • • • • • •

three-seater sofa

Attaching Boxed Arms to the Sofa

271

29. Smooth and pull the excess fabric to the back of the arm and sub-staple the back of the top arm to the back of the sofa. Check that the front corner is still tight and in the correct position; make adjustments if necessary.

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

three-seater sofa

272

30. Smooth the fabric down from the top of the

31. Smooth the fabric toward the post at the bot-

inside arm and make a release cut around the bar at the top of the inside back. Pull the fabric tightly and sub-staple on either side of the cut. Instead of folding under the excess fabric on the topside of the cut, lay it out straight and staple it down.

tom of the inside back, and then perform another release cut. Pull the fabric through the frame and sub-staple in place.

32. Lift up the layers on the outside arm and pull

33. Staple the burlap we left unstapled in step 2,

through the inside arm fabric. Pull the fabric tightly enough to cause the welt cord to dip slightly at the top of the inside arm, and then sub-staple the fabric under the arm. To test the tightness, pull down the fabric on the outside arm to make sure the welt cord will realign with the edges of the frame. Make adjustments to the tightness of the inside arm, if necessary, and then replace the sub-staples with permanent ones and trim off the excess fabric.

fold back the excess, and staple again.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 272

7/9/13 12:10 PM

page

273 three-seater sofa

35. Pull the back edge of the outside arm fabric

the bottom layer to the bottom of the outside arm. Cut off any excess Dacron even with the bottom edge of the sofa.

toward the back of the sofa until the welt cord on the front of the arm lines up with the edges of the frame, and then sub-staple in place.

36. Attach the fabric at the bottom of the outside

37. At this point, the fabric should be in the

arm when itʼs pulled tightly enough to align the rest of the welt cord with the frame.

desired position, but we still have a few areas to clean up before we can staple it down permanently. At the bottom of the front arm, open up the seam in the welt cord and cut out the cording until it’s even with the bottom edge of the sofa frame.

Ch. 24: Padding and Constructing Boxed Arms

34. Smooth the Dacron down and split and staple

38. Fold under the excess fabric from the release cut made in step 28 and staple the front arm fabric under the sofa frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 273

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

39. Repeat steps 37 and 38 on the three other ends of welt cord, removing the cording so it’s even with the edges of the frame, and then staple them down. Examine the arm and make final adjustments to the positioning of the fabric. Replace all sub-staples with permanent ones and trim off the excess fabric.

three-seater sofa

274

three-seater sofa

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 274

40. Repeats steps 1–14 and 27–39 for the other arm.

Deck and arms complete

7/9/13 12:11 PM

Chapter 25

page

275

Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions We’ve done picture backs, channel backs,and wingbacks, but we haven’t upholstered a back with back cushions, also known as a loose back. Say that five times fast. The main difference between backs with and without back cushions is the thickness of the padding. Because the primary padding on this sofa is the down-filled back cushions, we only need a light layer of foam behind them to soften the hard edges of the frame.

Attaching Webbing and Burlap to the Inside Back Just like the arms, the inside backhas its own frame built for stapling and pulling through. The right and left sides of the inside back pull through the same spaces as the back of the inside arms; be sure to keep them clear

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 275

of excessive padding so there’s enough room to pull through the fabric. Staple burlap and webbing to the frame within the edges of the inside back.

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

Ch. 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions

three-seater sofa

276

Supplies • • • • • • • • •

Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Measuring tape Burlap White or yellow chalk

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 276

1. Just as we did with the seat and the arms, we’ll start by stretching and stapling webbing to the inside back (see page 263). Since there is such a large opening, we’ll attach vertical and horizontal strips of webbing for extra support.

2. Cut out a piece of burlap large enough to cover the opening of the inside back, and then stretch and staple it to the frame. Fold back the excess burlap and staple again.

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

Supplies Small edge roll or leftover welt cord Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples Scissors 1"–2"-thick low-density foam Permanent marker Electric carving knife Cotton batting Spray adhesive Dacron

3. The top edge of the inside back is sharp and gets a lot of wear, so we’ll attach small edge roll or leftover welt cord to it just as we did with the arms. Line up the edge roll or welt cord with the front top edge of the inside back and staple through the tail to attach it to the sofa. Stop the cording even with the inside arms.

Ch. 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions

• • • • • • • • • • •

three-seater sofa

Padding the Inside Back

277

4. Measure the widest distance between the inside arms, and cut a full slab of foam to this width with the carving knife. I’m using 1" super-soft foam and Dacron to add a light layer of cushioning to the inside back. Center the foam on the back and squish the bottom under the inside back. Smooth the foam up and over the inside back and trace the back edge of the sofa with a permanent marker. Cut on the marked line with the carving knife.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 277

5. Remove the foam and staple a layer of cotton batting between the welt cord and back edge of the sofa to fill in the dip created behind the cording.

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

Ch. 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions

three-seater sofa

278

6. Put the foam on the inside back and tuck it into the space at the bottom, right, and left sides. Hold the cut edge even with the back edge of the sofa and staple it to the sofa frame. Use the same technique for stapling the foam as we did for the arms (see step 8, page 265).

7. Cut out a sheet of Dacron large enough to cover the foam on the inside back, with an additional 3" on all sides for pulling. Tuck the bottom few inches of Dacron under the inside back, and then lay the Dacron down on the deck. Spray adhesive on the foam and Dacron. Be careful not to spray adhesive on the fabric!

Sticky Situation Before you use the spray adhesive, always check the nozzle and make sure it’s not gummed up or pointing the wrong direction. The last thing you want to do is spray adhesive on your fabric or yourself! And by the way, remember to work in a wellventilated space (see page 349).

8. Pull up the Dacron and stick it to the foam. Make release cuts around the posts on the right and left sides, and then pull the Dacron through the frame. Trim off any excess Dacron even with the back edge of the sofa.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 278

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Measuring tape Pencil Paper Fabric Square Yardstick White or yellow chalk Welt cord stick (optional) Scissors 5/32" fiber flex welt cord Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot Thread

9. Use the measurement from step 4 to determine

10. Slightly compress the padding and measure

the width of the inside back (74") and measure from the deck to the top edge of the inside back to determine the height (18"). Add an extra 10" to both dimensions for sewing, pulling, and stapling (84" wide × 28" tall).

the thickness at the top of the inside back (2½"). Add 3" for sewing, pulling, and stapling (5½"). The width of the boxing will be the same as the width of the inside back piece.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 279

Ch. 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions

Because all the edges of the sofa frame will be outlined in welt cord, I’ve decided to sew welt cord and a small boxing to the top of the inside back to delineate its front edge. Whether or not you box the top edge of the inside back is completely up to you and how you choose to style your furniture. Feel free to skip to step 14 if you plan on upholstering a smooth inside back.

three-seater sofa

Sewing a Boxed Edge on the Inside Back

279

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

280

Ch. 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions

three-seater sofa

Inside back boxing

Inside back

51⁄2"

28"

84"

11. Use a square and yardstick to draw the inside back and boxing on the fabric, and then cut them out. Draw, cut out, and stitch single welt cord to the same width as the inside back (see page 364 for single welt cord instructions).

12. With the single-welt cord foot attached to the sewing machine, lay the welt cord on top of the inside back fabric, with the tail of the welt cord lined up with the top edge of the fabric. From one end to the other, stitch along the right side of the welt cord and attach it to the good side of the inside back fabric.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 280

13. Lay the boxing facedown on top of the inside back fabric and welt cord, with the front edge of the boxing lined up with the top edge of the inside back. Stitch from one end to the other.

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

281

Supplies Sewn inside back Ruler Goggles Staple gun 3/8" staples White or yellow chalk Scissors Staple remover Pliers

14. Center the sewn fabric over the inside back. Pull the back middle of the boxing over the back edge of the sofa while measuring the boxing with a ruler. When the welt cord is the same distance from the back edge of the sofa as the original measurement from step 10, sub-staple the fabric to the back of the sofa.

15. While standing in front of the sofa, pull and smooth the excess fabric down and make a release cut at any wooden posts in the center of the sofa. Pull the fabric under the inside back and sub-staple on either side of the post.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 281

Ch. 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions

• • • • • • • • •

three-seater sofa

Attaching the Inside Back to the Sofa

16. Continue measuring and sub-stapling the top of the back from the center out. Smooth the excess fabric down and toward the sides, and sub-staple all the way across. Perform release cuts around the posts on the right and left sides, pull the fabric through the space, and staple.

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

282

17. With all four sides in place, let’s clean up the

19. Repeat steps 17 and 18 for the other side.

connection between the inside back and arms. Lay the excess boxing on top of the arm and use your scissors to open up the seam on the welt cord. Cut out the cording even with the welt cord of the inside arm.

20. When you’re happy with the smoothness and tightness of the inside back, replace the sub-­ staples with permanent ones.

18. Fold the excess boxing under the foam and Dacron so it meets the cording on the inside arm and sub-staple the fabric to the outside back.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 282

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

283

Deck, arms, and inside back complete

three-seater sofa

three-seater sofa

Ch. 25: Upholstering an Inside Back with Back Cushions

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 283

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

284

Chapter 26

Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame With the inside and outside armscompleted in one fell swoop, we only have a few more tasks before moving on to cushion sewing. After we upholster the outside back, we’ll wrap up the sofa frame with hand sewing and attaching the dustcover. If your outside arms were not completed with the inside arms, follow the steps for attaching the outside back to upholster them first. For outside arm edges shared with the outside back, staple fabric to the surface of the outside back instead of enclosing with welt cord and Pli-Grip.

Upholstering the Outside Back Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Jute webbing Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples Webbing stretcher Scissors Measuring tape Burlap Fabric Yardstick Welt cord stick (optional) White or yellow chalk Sewing machine

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 284

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Single-welt cord foot Thread 5/32" fiber flex welt cord Square Cardboard tack strip Pli-Grip Inexpensive scissors Painter’s or masking tape Dacron Regulator Rubber mallet Pliers Staple remover

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

285 three-seater sofa

2. To create a solid, smooth surface, stretch and staple a layer of burlap to the outside back.

4. Start at the bottom of one side, leaving an extra

5. Pre-bend corners before stapling them down and cut out the excess fabric to minimize bulk. At the bottom of the last side, leave another 1" of extra cording. Open up the seams in the extra welt cord at the bottom of either side, cut out the cording even with the bottom edge, and staple the tail to the bottom of the sofa frame.

1" hanging below the sofa. Staple cording up and around the top and other side of the outside back. As you staple, use your forefinger and thumb to line up the edge of the cording with the wooden edge of the sofa frame. The tail of the cording should be going in toward the center of the outside back.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 285

3. Draw, cut out, and stitch single welt cord long enough to go around the top and sides of the outside back and around the bottom perimeter of the sofa (see page 364 for single welt cord instructions).

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

1. Begin by attaching webbing to the outside back. On the inside back, we attached vertical and horizontal strips of webbing. Since the outside back doesn’t get any pressure from the sitter, we’ll only attach a few strips of webbing to help support the burlap and fabric.

7/9/13 12:11 PM

page

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

three-seater sofa

286

6. Draw and cut out a piece of fabric large enough to cover the outside back, with an additional 3" of height and width for pulling and stapling. Center the fabric over the outside back with the backside facing you. Line up the top edge of the fabric with the tail of the welt cord and staple the fabric across the top of the outside back.

7. Just as we did with the tack band below the deck (page 259), we’ll blind-tack the top edge of the outside back. Push cardboard tack strip up into the welt cord and staple it across the top edge. Snip off the top corners of the cardboard so they fit tightly behind the corners of the welt cord.

8. To attach fabric to the sides of the outside

9. Attach Pli-Grip to both sides of the sofa and

back, we’ll attach Pli-Grip below the cardboard tack strip. Push the foot of the Pli-Grip into the welt cord and permanently staple with one prong through the center hole and one prong to the side of the foot. Continue stapling through every hole until you’re ½" from the bottom edge of the sofa. Cut off the excess Pli-Grip and any sharp corners at the ends with a pair of inexpensive scissors.

push the teeth down. Stick a small piece of painter’s or masking tape around the corners on the end to blunt the sharp metal edges.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 286

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

287 three-seater sofa

cover the outside back and staple it to the top edge. Smooth the Dacron to the bottom of the sofa and staple. Remember to staple in between the layers of Dacron, so the top layer conceals any indentations.

12. After all four sides of Dacron are stapled, trim the Dacron even with the outside edges of the PliGrip and bottom edge of the sofa frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 287

11. Split and staple the Dacron just behind the PliGrip on the right and left sides.

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

10. Cut out a piece of Dacron large enough to

13. Pull the fabric down and sub-staple the ­ iddle to the bottom of the sofa. Work from the m middle out to attach the fabric all the way across the bottom.

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

three-seater sofa

288

14. Smooth the fabric over the left side and mark

15. Start at the top of the side and pull the fabric

the outside edge of the Pli-Grip with chalk. Trim off the excess fabric ½" beyond the chalked line. It’s important to leave only ½" of fabric because any more than that will be too bulky to tuck into the Pli-Grip teeth.

down and out with the palm of your hand while using the other hand to tuck the fabric into the Pli-Grip with the flat end of the regulator.

16. When you reach the bottom, make another

17. Use the rubber mallet to hammer down the

pass with the sharp end of the regulator to tuck in any strings or remaining slivers of fabric. If you’re having trouble getting the fabric to stay in the PliGrip, try pushing the Pli-Grip down more tightly.

Pli-Grip all the way.

18. Repeat steps 14–17 to complete the right side. When both sides are secured in place, replace the sub-staples along the bottom of the sofa with permanent ones.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 288

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

Before staple guns and Pli-Grip,upholsterers hand-sewed most projects. Although it’s more time-consuming to hand-sew, a slipstitch (page 367) is the simplest and cleanest method for small areas that need tightening.

for instructions on performing a slipstitch. For the connection between the front arm and the deck, begin the slipstitch 1" below the top of the deck and end at the bottom of the sofa by stapling the ends of the thread under the sofa frame.

• Thread • Curved needle • Scissors

20. Where the inside back boxing meets the top of the arm, begin the slipstitch at the back edge of the sofa and end at the welt cord on the inside back. Hide the ends of sewing thread in the crevice between the arm and inside back.

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

19. Refer to Sewing Tips and Tricks on page 367

Supplies

three-seater sofa

Hand-Sewing Connections in the Sofa

289

21. Repeat steps 19 and 20 for the other side of the sofa.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 289

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

three-seater sofa

290

Attaching Welt Cord and Dustcover to the Bottom of the Sofa Supplies • • • • • • • • • •

Sewn welt cord Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples Scissors Painter’s or masking tape Measuring tape Dustcover Cardboard tack strip White or yellow chalk

22. For the rest of the steps, flip the sofa upside down. Staple the welt cord made in step 3 around the bottom edge of the sofa, starting at the back middle. When you begin, leave an extra 1½" of cording, which we’ll connect to the other side at the end.

23. Use your forefinger and thumb to line up the edge of the cording with the wooden edge of the sofa frame. Pre-bend corners before stapling them down and cut out the excess fabric to minimize bulk.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 290

24. Continue stapling around the bottom edge of the sofa until you’re 2" from where you started. Cut off the excess cording 1½" past the middle.

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

291 three-seater sofa

26. Wrap a piece of tape around the ends of the

27. Lay the fabric from one side straight out and around the cording. Fold under the fabric on the other side and wrap it around the fabric and cording so no raw fabric or cording shows. Finish the welt cord by stapling the connected ends to the sofa.

28. Cut a piece of dustcover large enough to cover

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 291

cords to connect them together.

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

25. Open up the seams of the stitched cording about 3" on both ends to expose the cord inside. Lay the raw cords (without fabric) side-by-side and cut through both so they meet.

the bottom of the sofa with an additional 3" in width and height for pulling and stapling. Center the dustcover over the front edge of the sofa and staple ½" of its front edge on top of the welt cord tail. Reinforce this first stapled edge by pushing cardboard tack strip into the welt cord and stapling it on top of the dustcover.

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

three-seater sofa

292

29. Before we continue stapling the dustcover, staple cardboard tack strip into the welt cord on the other three sides. This keeps the welt cord tight to the frame.

30. Pull the dustcover tightly to the backside of the sofa and make release cuts around the legs. Since these legs are a few inches from the edges of the sofa, I’ll cut an X in the dustcover to make a square hole for the legs to poke through.

31. Slip the dustcover over the legs and pull it to

32. To prevent the release cut flaps from falling

the backside of the frame. Pull tightly enough to smooth out the dustcover without stretching it out. Fold the dustcover under so the folded edge meets the welt cord, and then staple it down. Continue folding under and stapling until the entire backside is stapled. Repeat this step to attach the right and left sides.

out, staple the dustcover around the legs. Flip over the sofa and admire the finished frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 292

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

293

If doctors can sew up a patient with forceps inside, imagine how easy it is to close up a sofa with tools left in the inside back or under the dustcover. The first piece of furniture I ever upholstered was finished with a pair of scissors inside. When I turned the chair over to admire my hard work, the loud metal clanking against the frame startled me. Since then, I always do a spot check before closing up my project.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 293

Frame complete

Ch. 26: Attaching the Outside Back and Completing the Sofa Frame

three-seater sofa

three-seater sofa

Case of the Disappearing Scissors

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

294

Chapter 27

Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions When I talk to students at Spruce,I often hear, “I don’t have any sewing experience. Can I still do upholstery?” Absolutely! To their surprise and perhaps to yours, upholstery involves a very small percentage of sewing. This sofa has more sewing than most, with its boxed arms and multiple seat cushions, but with the steps we completed during chapter 24 and Sewing Tips and Tricks (page 358), you’ll be surprised by how easily these cushions go together.

Determining the Size and Shape of the Seat Cushion As with the wingback project,our first step is to determine the size and shape of the cushions. As we discussed in chapter 20, I want the seat to be plush and comfy but with more support than the old cushion. I’ve opted for low-density foam wrapped in a feather case to achieve both goals. When determining the thickness of the seat cushion, consider aesthetics and function. A typical seating height is 16"–18", so avoid a thickness that will bump you out of this range. Also, measure the height of other seating in the room. Do you want the sofa to be 4" lower than the adjacent chair? It’s better to be eye to eye with others when enjoying afternoon tea

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 294

or playing a game of Yahtzee. Okay, maybe you don’t do either of those, but you get the point. Most of the time, I determine padding thickness by proportions. A 3"–4" cushion is typical for a medium to large piece of furniture and looks proportional to the rest of the frame, so I’ve chosen an overall thickness of 4" for my seat cushion. To achieve this with down-wrapped foam, I subtract 1"–2" from my overall thickness to determine the thickness of the foam, and the down wrap fills in the rest. I’d like the cushion to have considerable squish to it, so I’ll use 2"-thick foam and fill in the rest with feathers.

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

295

Dustcover White or yellow chalk Masking tape Scissors 2"-thick low-density foam Spray adhesive Permanent marker Electric carving knife Scrap burlap

1. To determine the shape of the seat cushion, lay a piece of dustcover over the deck and tuck it under the inside arms and back. Be sure the dustcover is smooth, tight, and covering the entire top surface of the deck. Use a new stick of chalk to mark the inside shape of the sofa on the dustcover. Put tape over the top half of the chalk to prevent it from getting on the fabric and keep it upright and pressed against the insides of the sofa as you draw.

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

• • • • • • • • •

three-seater sofa

Supplies

2. It can be tricky to mark the front edge since the deck is rounded. Freehand a line across the front, even with the front surface of the deck. If you feel unsure about the front edge, leave it longer and cut off the excess after you place the foam on the sofa.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 295

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

296 three-seater sofa

3. Remove the pattern from the sofa and fold it in half to check its symmetry. Sometimes a pattern will be asymmetrical because the padding or frame is different on one side. If there are slight differences between one side and the other, trim the pattern to be symmetrical. If there are significant differences, double-check your pattern with the sofa to make sure it’s correct. If it’s correct, mark the side facing up as “top” and leave the pattern as-is. It’s better to have a cushion that is asymmetrical than a cushion that doesn’t fill the space in the sofa.

4. The depth of the seat cushion is greater than the depth of a slab of foam, so I will attach two slabs together. Lay two slabs of foam, one on top of the other, and spray adhesive on the edges you wish to glue together.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 296

5. Allow the adhesive to get tacky, and then flip the top slab over and stick the tacky sides together. Use your fingertips to press the foam together as it dries.

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

297 three-seater sofa

facing up) and trace the edge with a permanent marker. If your pattern is asymmetrical, mark “top” on the topside of the foam. Use a carving knife to cut out the foam on the marked line. Put the cut foam back in the sofa and check the fit. Make adjustments, as needed, until the foam meets the insides and front edge of the sofa without being squished and forced in place.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 297

7. When you’re happy with the fit of the cushion, glue a strip of burlap over the seams on both sides of the foam. This helps reinforce the connection so the foam doesn’t come apart. After years of cutting, sewing, and stuffing down cushions and wraps, I’ve found that with the right supplier, purchasing wraps that are custom made to size is as cost-effective and far more efficient than making your own (see Resources, page 385).

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

6. Lay the pattern on the foam (with the “top”

7/9/13 12:12 PM

page

three-seater sofa

298

Determining the Size of the Back Cushions Supplies • • • •

Seat padding Measuring tape Pencil Paper

8. Stuff the seat foam into the down wrap and place it on the sofa. Measure the width of the space across the middle of the inside back (72"). I would typically divide this measurement by 3 to determine the width of the three back cushions (24"). Since these cushions are filled with feathers, they’ll be fluffier and have more crown than a rigid foam cushion. More crowning equals less surface area covered by the cushions, so we’ll add an extra 1" to each cushion width to accommodate for this (25").

9. Slightly compress the seat cushion and measure from the cushion to the top of the inside back (12"). I’d like my back cushions to cover the top of the inside back when I lean back, so I’ll add 2" to the height to achieve this (14").

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 298

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

299 three-seater sofa

Cutting Out Fabric for the Cushions Supplies

10. Use the seat foam or the pattern made out

11. In addition to the top and bottom face, we

of dustcover to trace the shape of the seat cushion onto the fabric. If you adjusted the shape of the foam after tracing the pattern, use the foam to trace the fabric. Since the foam is wrapped in down, it will have more of a crown than the typical foam cushion, so we’ll add an extra ½" all the way around the pattern to accommodate for this. When tracing, draw 1" beyond the pattern on all sides. A ½" will be taken in for seam allowance while the other ½" will cover the crown of the cushion. After you’ve traced one face of the cushion, flip over the cushion or pattern and trace the other side.

need boxing for the front, sides, and zipper boxing along the back of the cushion. The length of the front boxing is calculated by adding the length of the front to the depth of the sides (without seam allowance) (136"). The height of the front boxing is the thickness of the overall cushion (4") plus 1" for seam allowance (5"). The length of the zipper boxing is the length of the back of the cushion plus 10" (84") and the height is the thickness of the cushion plus 2" for seam allowance (6"). Because we stitch the zipper boxing to each cushion face and to each side of the zipper, we need four seam allowances for a total of 2" extra.

Zipper boxing 84"

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

• Seat cushion pattern and measurements for the back cushions • Calculator • Fabric • Square • Yardstick • White or yellow chalk • Welt cord stick (optional) • Scissors

6" 5"

Front boxing 136"

54" Bottom face

32"

Bottom face

32"

75"

75" 150"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 299

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

300

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

three-seater sofa

35" Zipper boxing

35" Zipper boxing 26"

35" Zipper boxing 26"

6"

26"

Front face

Front face

Front face 15"

Back face

Back face

Back face 15"

12. In steps 8 and 9, we determined the dimensions of the finished back cushions are 25" wide × 14" tall. Add 1" to the width and height for seam allowances and use the square and yardstick to draw out the six back cushion faces on the fabric. Repeat step 11 to draw the boxing for the top of the cushion and the zipper boxing.

Top boxing 53"

5"

Top boxing 53"

5"

Top boxing 53"

5"

54"

13. After you’ve drawn the faces and boxings for the seat and back cushions, draw the lines for the welt cord. For the seat cushion, we’ll need 210" for each face, or 420" total. For the back cushions, we’ll need 78" for each face and a total of 468". Cut out all pieces for the cushions and identify each piece; also identify which edge is the top by marking in chalk on the backside.

Sewing the Cushions Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Fabric pieces for cushions Iron Zipper chain Scissors Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot Thread 5/32" fiber flex welt cord Masking tape Hand-stapling plier or T-pins Zipper pull Seat and back cushion padding Air blower 14. Cut each zipper boxing in half lengthwise and press down the inside seam allowances that attach to the zipper chain.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 300

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

301 three-seater sofa

16. Starting from the end you just finished, flip the fabric around and repeat step 15 to stitch the other half of the zipper boxing to the zipper. When both sides are sewn, the fabric should meet in the middle and cover the zipper chain.

17. Repeat steps 15 and 16 for the rest of the zippers.

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

15. Cut a piece of zipper chain the same length as each zipper boxing. Place the zipper teeth under the welt cord foot with the pressed edge of the zipper boxing aligned with the center of the zipper teeth. Lower the sewing foot and stitch the right side of the zipper boxing to the zipper chain.

18. Stitch all of the single welt cord and attach it to the perimeter of every cushion face. Start at the bottom middle of a back cushion face, leaving an extra 1½" of cording for connecting the ends. Line up the edge of the welt cord tail with the outside edges of the cushion face and stitch along the right side of the cording all the way around. Make small cuts in the seam allowance to pre-bend the cording at corners and pivot the fabric under the sewing foot to get corners nice and tight (see page 362).

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 301

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

19. When you’re back to where you started, follow steps 25–27 from chapter 26 to connect the ends of welt cord. Then stitch the connected ends to the cushion face.

20. Repeat steps 18 and 19 for all cushion faces. For the seat cushion, start and end at the back middle.

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

three-seater sofa

302

21. Stitch the top boxings to the front cushion faces. Line up the bottom left front corner of the top boxing with the bottom left corner of the cushion face. With good sides facing and edges aligned, use the hand-stapling plier or T-pins to connect the seam allowances together. Start 3" from the left corner and stitch up and around the top and right sides. Make small release cuts and pivot the fabric at corners. Stop sewing when you are 3" from the bottom of the right side.

22. At the top corners, fold the boxing straight

23. With good sides together and edges aligned,

across and cut a notch where the other corner should line up.

use the hand-stapling plier to staple the top corners of the back cushion face to the notches from step 22.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 302

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

303 three-seater sofa

the top edge and down the right and left sides. Keep the fabric smooth and evenly distributed as you staple.

26. Center the top middle of the zipper boxing on the bottom middle of the front face and staple the seam allowances together. With good sides together and edges aligned, stitch from the middle to just past the left corner. Flip over the fabric and stitch from the middle to just past the right corner. Remove staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 303

25. Stitch the top boxing to the back cushion face, leaving the bottom 3" unsewn on both ends. Inspect the top corners of the cushion to make sure they’re lined up.

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

24. Staple the cushion face to the boxing along

27. Repeat step 26 to stitch the back face to the other side of the zipper boxing.

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

three-seater sofa

304

28. Attach the zipper pull to one end of the zipper chain and unzip the zipper 6"–10".

29. With good sides facing, meet one end of the zipper boxing with the end of the top boxing and seam them together. As you approach the zipper, place a small square of doubled-over fabric over the zipper chain and stitch over it. This piece of fabric will reinforce the end of the zipper and keep the pull from coming off.

30. The extra fabric at the end of the boxings will fold behind the top boxing, creating a pocket for the zipper pull to slide into. Fold the connected boxing ends toward the top of the cushion and smooth out the fabric in the fold. The zipper boxing should be straight around the bottom corners and the top boxing should be folded back. Staple or hold the boxings in place with edges aligned and stitch around all corners to close up the cushion. Inspect the corners and sides to make sure the cushion is tightly sewn and no threads are showing. Stitch over loose seams to tighten, and remove any staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 304

7/9/13 12:13 PM

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

31. Repeat steps 21–30 to complete all other cushions. For the seat cushion, the top is the front and the bottom is the back. Insert the padding into the cases. Use the nap or pattern of the fabric to make sure the cushions are sitting on the sofa the right way (front face to the front of the sofa). Dust off any chalk or dirt with the air blower to complete the sofa.

Ch. 27: Fitting and Sewing Boxed Cushions

especially when it involves coil spring tying, boxed arms, and several loose cushions. Stripping, springs, deck, arms, back, and cushions, and here we are — days later — scratches, blisters, and all. If you’re not currently sitting on your completed sofa, trust me, the hours of work, good and bad, are worth every second for the feeling of accomplishment you get when sitting on your sofa for the first time. And that feeling never goes away, even after you’ve completed a dozen sofas and they’re not even yours.

three-seater sofa

A sofa is a large undertaking,

page

305

the finished sofa!

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 305

7/9/13 12:13 PM

Project 5

Ottoman Empire

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 306

7/9/13 12:13 PM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 307

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

308

Chapter 28

Material Requirements for Diamond Tufting and Leather Upholstery 101 ottoman

Before

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 308

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

309

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 309

Ch. 28: Material Requirements for Diamond Tufting and Leather Upholstery 101

Berkshire Leather by Garrett in Kelly Green

cocktail ottoman

In my house, the coffee table is the hubof the living room. It’s where I put my magazines, books, drinks, and Chinese takeout. In the evenings, the hubby and I sink down into the sofa with a glass of wine, kick up our feet, and relay the happenings of the day, but I’m always scrambling for a throw pillow to soften the hard wooden top. What better way to have the best of an ottoman and coffee table than to combine the two? I decided to repurpose the legs of our old table and make a new upholstered top. With a few pieces of wood, glue, brad nailer, and about an hour, I constructed the new top for the cocktail ottoman. I changed the size from 18" × 48" to 30" × 54" to coordinate better with the proportions of the sofa and slipper chairs. To help connect the upholstery to the dark chocolate legs, I had simple wooden trim stained to match the legs and cut to fit around the bottom edge of the top. Since this piece has such a large surface, I’m breaking it up with diamond tufting. With a sea of buttons between hand-folded pleats, diamond tufting gives dimension to an otherwise flat surface and makes flaws and imperfections that develop from frequent use less noticeable. I’ve also chosen leather for durability and cleanability, since this piece will be the center of attention and the catchall in the room. The kelly green is a bright complement to the oranges and reds, even as it brings out the blues and greens in the room and creates a balance between hot and cool colors.

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

from the spruce archives

design inspiration

310

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 310

Stripes are a good option for round ottomans where matching an organic pattern is rarely possible.

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

311

design inspiration

We repurposed the swivel base from a broken chair and constructed this new top to create this mod ottoman.

from the spruce archives

To stretch the limits of this handembroidered suzani, we framed each panel with a sturdy solid to cover the sides of this bench.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 311

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

312

Ch. 28: Material Requirements for Diamond Tufting and Leather Upholstery 101

cocktail ottoman

Determining Leather Requirements for the Ottoman Leather is sold by whole or half hidesand is measured by the square foot instead of yards. First, we’ll determine the overall dimensions of the leather. Then we’ll calculate them into

square feet to determine how many hides we need to order. We already know that the size of the ottoman is 30" × 54" but we’ll need a considerable allowance for pleating and tufting.

54" (before allowance) +10" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +4" +10" +10"

+3"

+4" +6"

+4" +4" +4"

+6" 30" (before allowance)

+4" +6"

+4" +4"

+6"

+4" +4"

+3" +10"

+3" +6" +6" +6" +6" +6" +6" +6" +6" +3"

1. Use the dimensions of the ottoman to deter-

4. Multiply the width by the depth in feet.

mine symmetrical spacing for the buttons and draw out the pattern. For every button, you need twice the depth of the padding for allowance. This ottoman has 2"-thick foam, so at every button, I need approximately 4" of leather. At the edges, add 10" for wrapping over the padding and stapling to the bottom of the frame.

• 11.83' × 7.17' = 84.82 square feet

2. Add the allowances to the original width and depth. The overall width of leather is 142" and the depth is 86". 3. Divide the overall dimensions by 12" to calculate the dimensions in feet. • 142"/12" = 11.83' wide • 86"/12" = 7.17' deep

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 312

This ottoman requires 84.82 square feet of leather. A large hide is generally 55 square feet, so we’ll need approximately 1½ hides to complete the project. Because of the amorphous edges of leather hides and the occasional hole, brand, or scar, it’s advisable to order at least ½ hide more than you need for projects, so Iʼll order 2 hides for the cocktail ottoman. If you’re working on furniture requiring several extra-large pieces, order 1–2 additional hides to ensure you get the pieces you need. Remember, leather is a natural product that comes with imperfections you’ll have to work around.

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

313

Calculating Number of Hides from Yards If you’re working on a project where it’s more complicated to calculate square feet, follow the steps from previous chapters to calculate yardage and divide the number by 21/2 to get the number of full-size hides (55 square feet) required. For instance, the sofa project requires 14 yards of fabric. If we divide 14 by 21/2, we get 5.6 hides. Since the sofa has extra-large surfaces to cover, round up to 6 hides and add an extra hide for good measure.

Choosing Which Leather to Use With hundreds of colorsand a wide variety of textures, leather can complement any aesthetic, color palette, or style. It also functions as one of the most durable and longest lasting materials. Because leather breathes very little, foam and padding materials last much longer behind this thick barrier from oxygen and dirt particles. And with regular maintenance, leather can be rejuvenated to its original condition time and time again. When purchasing leather for your next project, weigh the pros and cons of these choices: Expense. Leather can range from $90 per

hide to thousands of dollars. In many cases, expense is an indication of the time and effort put into creating a quality hide. Exotic colors must be tested over and over again to ensure consistent color matching from hide to hide, which comes at a price for the consumer.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 313

High-end leather manufacturers also produce hides with smoother surfaces and minimal imperfections. If you’re using multiple hides on one piece, color consistency is a key ingredient for a stunning upholstery job. Don’t take out a second mortgage on your house, but be wary of buying the cheapest hides available without close inspection. Color. From magenta to metallic, there’s leather to match. Although leather is the best material if you must have white, it can absorb oils, dirt, and dyes from clothing just as any other fabric does. Darker colors like chocolate or black show hair, dirt, and dust. Sheen. Leathers range from shiny to matte.

For a more rustic, worn look, opt for a duller, matte finish, which scars and lightens with use. Shinier leathers resist scuffing and can be polished to maintain a consistent sheen.

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

Ch. 28: Material Requirements for Diamond Tufting and Leather Upholstery 101

cocktail ottoman

314

Upholstering with Leather Working with leather issurprisingly similar to working with any other fabric. I am often asked, “Do you work with leather?” as if it requires a different set of skills and knowledge. When I began upholstery, I dove headfirst into my first leather chair, never knowing there would be any differences between it and the velvet chair from the previous week. I discovered a surprisingly similar set of procedures with a few tricks for achieving success.

Laying Out the Pieces Before cutting any fabric, always measure and lay out the pieces for your furniture. Because every hide is different, some will be longer and wider and some will have scars or holes where others are smooth. 1 Inspect the leather closely and mark any areas you’d like to avoid, such as holes, scars, and brands, by circling the areas with chalk. 2 Turn over the leather, measure, and mark pieces with chalk on the backside where the chalk won’t rub off. 3 Rearrange until you’ve fit all the pieces in the puzzle. To make life easier, draw out the largest pieces first, as smaller ones will have more options for placement. 4 Divide larger pieces into two or three pieces that seam together. Unless you’re incredibly lucky or have found a supply of mammoth cows, you’ll need to split up large backs and cushions into multiple pieces to upholster sofas and oversized chairs.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 314

Stapling, Smoothing, and Sewing Stapling leather is no different than stapling any other material, except that staples are prone to go right through the thick epidermis. When attaching leather, make sure it’s pressed against the wooden surface and reduce the air pressure in the staple gun so that the staples go into the wood with less force. If you’re still having trouble, purchase an inexpensive staple gun with a larger crown, meaning the staple will be wider and larger, making it harder to push through the material. A bonus of working with hair-in leather: skip the cardboard tack strip, Pli-Grip, and hand sewing and staple right on top. Use a regulator or your fingers to fluff the hair around the staples; you’ll never see a thing. Smoothing leather over a piece of furniture can be even easier than fabric because it stretches naturally. When you come across a thicker patch that resists pulling, wet the surface of the leather to make it more pliable. For hair-in or really thick hides, use clamps or pliers to get a firmer grip for pulling tightly. But be careful that you don’t pull leather so tightly that release cuts rip. Sewing leather is all about the right equipment. You’ll need an industrial machine with compound feed and special needles made just for leather. To minimize bulk from seaming cording strips together, cut and glue the ends instead of sewing end to end.

7/9/13 12:13 PM

page

315

Splicing Leather Together to Make Welt Cord

1. See Sewing Tips and Tricks to cut strips of welt cord, and then cut two ends complementary to each other. Use a razor blade to shave off the bottom half of the left end and the top half of the right end.

2. Apply leather or spray adhesive to the shaved ends with a small paintbrush. (If using spray adhesive, spray a small amount onto a disposable surface and use from there.)

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 315

3. Carefully stick the shaved ends together to make a continuous piece of welt cord with an invisible seam.

7/16/13 1:50 PM

page

Ch. 28: Material Requirements for Diamond Tufting and Leather Upholstery 101

cocktail ottoman

316

Venting Leather Since leather is skin and skin is a fairly impenetrable material (after all, water and air go around us, not through us), leather must be vented to allow air to escape quickly. Although upholstered pieces are not airtight, they do have limited passages for inflating and deflating. When the sitter stands, a cushion slowly fills with air as the padding expands from compression, but when the sitter sits, the pressure of his or her weight forces air out quickly. This pressure will eventually stress seams to the point of failure, so vents must be added to certain seating structures to prevent excessive wear and tear. Cushions can be vented through small grommets attached to the zipper boxing or by covering the zipper boxing or a portion of the bottom face with porous fabric. Using a complementary but porous fabric on the bottom of the cushion allows air to escape and saves money on material costs. Leave at least 4" of leather at the front edge of the bottom face so the contrasting material never shows. If you’re concerned about using both sides of the cushion, opt for venting through the zipper boxing only.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 316

Tight seats vent through the frame, but when they’re attached to solid wood or a piece of plywood, drill holes in the bottom surface to allow air to escape. No venting is required for arms and backs.

Finishing Touches It took learning the hard way and buying every bottle of glue on the market to figure out that nothing glues to leather. Since glue cannot penetrate nonporous fabric, you cannot glue decorative trim to leather, so it must be stapled or replaced with decorative nails. Although I prefer using decorative nailheads (see page 203), you can also use a gimp stapler (see page 67) to discreetly attach trim. If you are attaching double welt cord, place the nose of the gimp stapler in between the two cords and staple. The tiny staples go in with minimal visibility. For the best of both worlds, hammer decorative nails over welt cord. The cording covers the exposed staples while the tacks hold the cording in place. Use spring twine in place of welt cord to increase flexibility while minimizing bulk, making it easier to hammer in tacks.

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

317

Supplies for the Ottoman

Materials

• • • • • •

• • • • • • • • •

• • • •

1/2" staples Button twine Paper Pencil Permanent marker Protective gloves or medical tape (optional) Silicon spray Spray adhesive Thread White or yellow chalk

Tools & equipment

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

11/2" hole saw Air blower Button machine Button needle Calculator Dressmaker’s tape Drill and large drill bit Electric carving knife Goggles Magnetic tack hammer Measuring tape Pliers Regulator Scissors Screwdriver (optional) Sewing machine Square Staple gun Staple remover Two-piece dies and fabric cutter for the desired button size • Utility knife (optional) • Wooden dowel • Yardstick

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 317

2 hides of leather 1 slab 3"-thick high-density foam Burlap scraps Button fronts and loop backs 1 yard cardboard tack strip 2 yards cotton batting 2 yards dustcover Small piece of cardboard 2 yards stitched Dacron For more information on tools and materials, visit the glossary (page 369).

Ch. 28: Material Requirements for Diamond Tufting and Leather Upholstery 101

Basic supplies

cocktail ottoman

OVERVIEW

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

318

Chapter 29

Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman Diamond tufting is one of those skillsthat made my knees shake until I was generously given the secrets of success. Years ago, my colleague worked with a gentleman who had mastered diamond tufting. The man would not share his techniques, but my colleague began Covert Mission Diamond Tufting, carefully watching his coworker until he discovered the winning combination of padding materials and allowances that make the diamonds fall right into place.

Padding the Ottoman Supplies • • • • • • • •

ottoman

Yardstick Permanent marker Goggles Drill and large drill bit 3"-thick high-density foam Spray adhesive Electric carving knife 11/2" hole saw

• • • • • • •

Burlap Scissors Dressmaker’s tape Pencil Paper Cotton batting Stitched Dacron

Old legs, new top

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 318

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

319 cocktail ottoman

3" grid diamond configuration drill holes

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 319

2. With the large drill bit attached, drill through the tabletop at each point of every diamond. The larger the hole, the easier it will be to pull the ­buttons through the ottoman later.

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

1. Use the yardstick and permanent marker to mark a grid on the tabletop. In chapter 28 we determined that this ottoman will have a 6" square diamond configuration. I divided the tabletop into 3" × 3" squares, so I can easily find the four points of every diamond.

3. Follow steps 4 and 5 from chapter 27 (page 296) to connect two pieces of foam for the top of the ottoman. Then trace the top edge of the table on the foam and use a carving knife to cut out the shape. I’m using a 3"-thick high-density foam, but thickness may vary depending on the desired height of the ottoman. Spray adhesive on the tabletop and underside of the foam and attach the two together.

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

cocktail ottoman

320

4. Draw the diamond pattern on the foam.

5. With the hole saw attached to the drill, cut out the foam in the center of every intersection.

6. Glue a strip of burlap over any seams in the foam and cut away the burlap over the holes. These burlap strips will reinforce the seams and prevent the foam from coming apart.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 320

7. Use a dressmaker’s tape to measure the distance between holes (8½"). When measuring, extend the tape down into the holes to estimate where the buttons will be when pulled tightly. If your diamond is not square, measure and record the width and the height of the diamond.

7/9/13 12:14 PM

8. Cover the top surface of the foam with two layers of cotton batting. Use your fingers to remove the cotton over the holes and the excess around the edges of the foam.

9. Cut the threads and remove the cheesecloth from the stitched Dacron and lay it over the top and sides of the ottoman top. Use your hands or scissors to remove the batting over the holes and any excess at the bottom edges of the sides. (Since I’m attaching a piece of wooden trim around the bottom of the ottoman top, I’ll leave the space behind it clear of all padding so the trim attaches flush to the wooden frame.)

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 321

10. Use the dressmaker’s tape to determine the distance from a button on the outside edge to the bottom edge of the ottoman top (12"). If the distance from the outside buttons to the sides of the ottoman varies on different sides, take measurement for all distances and record.

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

cocktail ottoman

322

Marking and Sewing the Leather and Making Buttons As we discussed in the last chapter, leather frequently needs to be sewn together to make larger pieces for upholstery. With diamond tufting, we can hide the seams in the folds of the diamonds, otherwise known as vandyking, giving the illusion that the piece is made of one solid hide.

11. Use the measurements from steps 7 and 10 to draw the grid with allowances on the backside of the leather.

Supplies • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Leather Square White or yellow chalk Yardstick Scissors Sewing machine Thread Small piece of cardboard Button machine Two-piece dies and fabric cutter for the desired button size Magnetic tack hammer Silicone spray Button fronts and loop backs Wooden dowel

12"

81⁄2" 81⁄2"

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 322

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

323 cocktail ottoman

13. With good sides facing and cut edges aligned,

man is larger than the length of the cowhide, we’ll sew two hides together between 2 rows of diamonds. Be sure to leave an extra ½" of seam allowance beyond the sewn edges when you cut out the pieces.

join the two pieces of leather. As you stitch the zigzagged line, pivot the leather under the sewing foot at every point.

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

12. Because the overall width needed for the otto-

14. When sewn, the leather should be smooth with minimal puckering at the points of the diamonds.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 323

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

cocktail ottoman

324

15. We need 77 buttons for the ottoman. Fold a scrap of leather back and forth several times to create multiple layers. Place a small piece of cardboard beneath the leather and the fabric cutter on top with the sharp side down. Place all three on top of the wax cylinder and compress the handle of the button machine until the cutter goes all the way through the leather. Remove the leather and repeat until you’ve made enough circles to cover all the buttons.

16. Leather is difficult to squeeze into the dies of

17. Before making the button, spray silicone inside

18. Center the leather, facedown, over the hole of

the top die. This will make it slick and allow the leather to push into it more easily.

the top die. Center the button front (facedown) over the leather and use the dowel to push the leather and button front into the top die.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 324

the button machine, so hammer the circles flat and thin with a magnetic tack hammer. If you frequently work with leather, consider purchasing a set of button attachments made especially for extra-thick materials.

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

325 cocktail ottoman

20. Place the top die (hole down) on the bottom

tom of the button machine and place the loop back (loop down) into the hole of the die.

die and connect them together. As you move the top die into place, hold up the bottom so it doesn’t push out the fabric and button front.

21. Compress the handle of the button machine

22. Repeat steps 17–21 to make all of the buttons. If the back of the button twists or the edges of the leather are not completely inside the button, discard the button and make again.

while turning the dies. When you’ve pressed the dies several times, remove the top die and take out the button.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 325

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

19. Place the bottom die into the hole at the bot-

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

cocktail ottoman

326

Diamond Tufting the Ottoman Supplies • • • • • • • •

Sewn leather Button twine Buttons Scissors Button needle Cotton batting Regulator Goggles

23. Center the leather over the ottoman and use the grid from step 11 to place the button needle through the center hole in the leather and corresponding hole of the ottoman. Cut approximately 24" of button twine and place one end through the loop on the back of a button. Place both ends of button twine through the eye of the needle and pull the twine all the way through the ottoman top.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 326

• • • • •

Staple gun 1/2" staples Pliers Staple remover Protective gloves or medical tape (optional) • Air blower

24. Pull both ends of twine back and forth to make sure they move freely. Then make a slipknot in the strands of button twine. Place the left strand behind the right strand.

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

327 cocktail ottoman

26. Bring the left strand behind itself and through

27. Tighten the knot and place a small ball of

28. While pushing the button from the top, pull the right strand of twine to tighten the button halfway down in the hole.

c­otton in the loop between the slipknot and ottoman.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 327

the loose knot.

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

25. Bring the left strand around and over the right strand and itself.

7/9/13 12:14 PM

page

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

cocktail ottoman

328

29. Repeat steps 23–28 to pull through and tighten the other three buttons of the center diamond. Use your fingers and the regulator to neatly fold under and pleat the excess fabric of the diamond. The pleats should all be folded under in the same direction, toward the front of the ottoman.

30. Repeat step 29, working out from the middle until all buttons and pleats are in place. From the buttons to the edges of the ottoman, make pleats straight out to the side and use sub-staples to attach the leather to the bottom of the frame. Fold under these side pleats toward the closest corner.

To minimize the abuse of your hands, wear protective gloves or use medical tape to wrap your fingers and protect them from rope burn while pulling button twine.

31. At the corners, smooth the leather from the short side around the corner to the long side. Use a sub-staple to keep the leather in place.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 328

32. Make a single pleat to tuck in the excess leather so it’s even with the corner. While holding the edge of the pleat, open it up and cut out the excess leather. Leave enough leather to cover the corner and fold under at least ½".

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

329 cocktail ottoman

34. Repeat steps 31–33 for the three other corners. When the leather is in place, replace substaples with permanent staples and trim off the excess. Wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands and tighten every button to the full depth. Tie double knots behind the cotton balls to lock the slipknots in place.

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

33. Put the pleat in place, using the regulator to get a crisp and clean fold, and sub-staple.

History Lesson Upholsterers didn’t perform deep button tufting, as we just did, until the nineteenth century. Prior to that time, silk fabrics were narrow, so panels were seamed together toward the outside edges of a chair to make the necessary width. If buttons were deeply pulled, the seams would look unsightly, so upholsterers only pulled buttons to a shallow depth. In the nineteenth century, wider fabrics were made and used on chairs, and upholsterers began vandyking to seam fabric together within the folds on larger projects.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 329

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

330

Attaching the Dustcover Supplies • • • • • • • • • •

35. At this point, you may choose to add single welt cord to the bottom edge. If so, visit the sofa project on pages 290–291 for instructions on finishing the ottoman with cording. Since I’m adding wooden trim to the bottom edge, I’ll skip straight to dustcover.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 330

White or yellow chalk Screwdriver (optional) Measuring tape Dustcover Scissors Goggles Staple gun 1/2" staples Cardboard tack strip Utility knife (optional)

36. I’ve marked the placement of the legs with chalk and removed them to make attaching the dustcover easier. Just as we did with the Louis chair, wingback, and sofa, cut a piece of dustcover a few inches bigger than the bottom of the ottoman and staple ½" of one edge to one side. Reinforce the edge by stapling a strip of cardboard tack strip on top of it.

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

331 cocktail ottoman

38. If your legs are permanently attached, follow

the opposite side. Fold under the excess dustcover and staple. If you removed the legs, lift up an unstapled side and find the marks from the legs. Staple around the marks, and then use scissors or a utility knife to remove the dustcover where the legs attach.

steps 30–32 (page 292) to perform release cuts in the dustcover. Continue folding under and stapling until all four sides are smooth and attached. If you removed the legs, reattach them.

Ch. 29: Diamond Tufting the Cocktail Ottoman

37. Fold the dustcover over the cardboard toward

the finished ottoman!

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 331

7/9/13 12:15 PM

Project 6

Topping It Off

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 332

7/9/13 12:15 PM

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 333

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

334

Chapter 30

Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows Pillows soften a room and invite gueststo lounge a little longer. They make a stern sofa inviting and an impersonal room lived in and real. Pillows offer a way for guests to customize their seating and make furniture flexible. A comfortable sofa for a person of average height may be too deep for someone of diminutive stature, unless they have pillows to shorten the seat. The arm of a sofa becomes the head of a bed, and a wooden coffee table becomes a plush footrest. Guests can even find comfort on the floor with the support of a throw pillow.

How Many? Where is the happy medium between having enough and overdoing it? I hear customers say, “The throw pillows on my bed always wind up on the floor.” I am assuming this is not because the customer sleeps on the floor, but because the pillows are in the way and get tossed to the floor. If the pillows don’t enhance the comfort of a piece of furniture, think twice about adding them. If there’s not enough room for you, your guests, and your throw pillows, scale back. Although I’m an advocate of odd numbers, if three pillows as opposed to two would change a three-seater into a two-seater, go even. And leave a space available here and there to encourage a change-up. Who says the sofa pillows are bound to the sofa? Switch the arrangement and invite neighboring pieces to communicate.

How Big? Throw pillows are measured flatfrom seam to seam. When they’re filled, they become fatter, shorter, and less wide. A 20" pillow only fills 16"–18" of space when stuffed, so remember to increase the size to accommodate for loss of height and width. The most common sizes for throw pillows are 14" × 20" for rectangular pillows and 18"–22" for square. On low-back furniture, I prefer pillows with a height close to that of the inside back. For pieces like wingbacks, the height may vary from the top of the arms to mid-back, and is often decided by the fabric pattern and whether the pillow size detracts from the focal point of the chair. Furniture with extra-deep seating benefits from a thicker pillow, so consider adding boxing to these pillows to increase their girth.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 334

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

335

If the pillows are the pop in your room, by all means, don’t hold back. Otherwise, introduce pillows that communicate, but don’t dominate conversation. In rooms with bold use of pattern and color, I refrain from accessorizing with tassels, beads, and baubles, though the same can be lovely in an understated space. Styling of pillows is more a concern of personal taste than functionality; although a fussy pillow covered with sequins and tassels is more likely to be appreciated from a distance. Fabric choice on pillows can play an important role in the success of a room. When a piece seems disconnected from its counterparts, add a throw pillow in a neighboring fabric or introduce a new fabric that relates to another piece in the room. On the other hand, a perfectly coordinated and matched ensemble benefits from a little zing of dissonance subtly interjected by a throw pillow.

pillows and bolsters

What Style?

What’s in the fluff? There’s nothing like sinking into a squishy pillow. The variety of fill is vast, so here’s a breakdown of the most common types to help you decide which is best for you. See the Resources section for a list of suppliers. Blown fiberfill is polyester batting com-

monly used in ready-made pillows. It’s inexpensive, holds its shape, and lasts a long time. It’s also hypoallergenic, making it a good option for people who are allergic to feathers or down. Because it holds its shape so well and is less pliable, it tends to look stiff and is not quite as squishy as other padding options. Cluster fiberfill (aka angel hair) is another polyester product made up of tiny balls of polyester. It has the same characteristics as blown fiberfill, but is squishier and more pliable because the fibers are separated. If you’re looking for an animal-free or hypoallergenic alternative to down, this is the pillow for you.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 335

Feather or down is a luxury fill made of the

feathers of ducks or geese. These inserts are made of a combination of down (the undercoat of ducks and geese) and feathers. The more down that is in a pillow, the softer, plusher, and more expensive it gets. The most common, 10/90 down, is the least expensive but only has 10 percent down. 50/50 down pillows are equal parts down and feather, at four to five times the cost. Kapok is a fibrous natural material sourced

from the tropical kapok tree. It’s long-lasting, waterproof, eco-friendly, and similarly priced to feather. With similar texture to cotton batting, kapok is denser and has less bounce-back than the other options listed above. A tip for creating plump pillows: use inserts that are 1"–2" bigger than the case to increase fluffiness and avoid deflated or flat-looking pillows.

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

pillows and bolsters

336

The Design Plan With the variety of shapes, colors,and patterns in the room, the goal of the pillows is to ­create a web of connections that links each individual piece to the community of furniture in the space. It’s through this chain of connections that we can introduce fabrics that are unconventional, yet surprisingly relevant, making a more interesting combination of textiles.

Designers Guild’s Varese in Ocean

Solid velvet pillows add blue to my room, helping to connect the wall color and balance the cool and warm colors. I’ve chosen a knifeedge styling and 14" × 20" size, which will work with any piece in the room, from the sofa to the slipper chairs, without overcrowding the seat. To contrast with the boxy lines of the sofa, we’ll make bolsters to sit inside the arms. I measured from the back cushion to the front edge of the sofa to determine the length of the bolsters (21") and will make the diameter of the cylinder half of the height of the inside arms (5"). I’ve chosen a black, white, and oatmeal stripe to connect the neutrals (white and black from the slipper chairs and oatmeal base cloth from the wingback and Louis chair) and to accentuate the roundness of the bolsters. For the circles on the ends of the bolster, I found oatmeal linen to match the base cloth of the striped fabric, and to further define the round ends, I’ll attach welt cord made of a solid black velvet. These types of fabric also connect the materials used in the room. The welt cord and black stripe are velvet, just like the fabric of the blue throw pillows, sofa, and Louis chair, while the oatmeal is linen, like the wingback and slipper chairs.

Larsen’s Eru in Mother of Pearl

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 336

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

337 pillows and bolsters

Christopher Farr’s Flowershow in Lime

Determining Yardage

21"

15"

1. Add 1" of seam allowances to the height and

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

Two boxed pillows help shorten the depth of the sofa while providing extra cushioning against the slim, boxed arms. Christopher Farr’s acid yellow floral is an awakening jolt of color that connects to the neon colors in the Louis chair, hints of red and yellow in the wingback, and green of the cocktail ottoman. The pillows will be 18" square and have a 2" boxing to increase the plumpness and depth. With boxing so small, welt cord would create a messy edge, so we’ll topstitch the seams to keep them flat and clean.

width of every pillow to determine the pillows’ cut size. The blue pillows will be 15" tall × 21" wide when cut. The velvet fabric is 55" wide, so we can place two pillow faces side by side. We need four faces (two for the front and two for the back), or 30" of fabric, which rounds up to 1 yard.

velvet pillow face (4)

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 337

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

pillows and bolsters

338

16¾" (5" × π)

16¾"

22"

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

2. The cut length of the bolsters is 22" and the

22" (21" + 1")

bolster body (2)

6" (5" + 1")

bolster end (4)

19"

19"

boxed pillow face (4)

3"

19" boxed pillow boxing (8)

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 338

ends are 6"-diameter circles. To calculate the distance around the finished bolster, multiply π  (3.14)  by the 5" diameter (15.71"). Add 1" for seam allowances (16.71"). Do not add seam allowance to the diameter of the bolster before multiplying by π.

3. We’re only using the striped fabric for the body of the bolster. The fabric is 51" wide and the stripes are mirrored at the center of the roll, so we can place the bolster pieces side by side. We’ll need 16¾" of fabric, or approximately ½ yard. We will place the four bolster ends side by side, so we’ll need 6" of the oatmeal fabric, or approximately ¼ yard. To make four 17" lengths of welt cord with no seams, we’ll need about ½ yard of the black velvet fabric.

4. The cut size of the faces of the floral pillows is 19" × 19". We’ll seam the boxing together at every corner, so each boxing piece is 3" tall × 19" wide. We can fit two faces side by side on the 52" wide fabric and two pieces of boxing side by side. That means we need two rows of faces (38") and four rows of boxing (12"), or 1½ yards of fabric. Since the vertical repeat of this fabric is 41", we’d need 82" of fabric to perfectly match the pillows, which is an additional yard of fabric, but I’d only be able to match the top boxing to the top edge. With no horizontal repeat, the sides cannot match. In situations like this, use your discretion to determine whether or not to pattern-match. If the fabric is inexpensive or leftover from another project, you may decide to match the top. With this large and busy fabric, I’ve decided to save my dollars and do the best I can with 1½ yards.

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

339

Supplies for Pillows

Basic Supplies

• • • •

Masking tape Thread T-pins White or yellow chalk

Tools & equipment

Hand-stapling plier and staples (optional) Scissors Sewing machine Single-welt cord foot or zipper foot attachment

Materials

• • • • •

5/32" fiber flex welt cord Fabric Pillow inserts Zipper chain Zipper pulls For more information on tools and materials, visit the glossary (page 369).

Sewing a Knife-Edge Pillow

5. Use the cut dimensions to draw and cut out the solid blue pillows. Use a square and yardstick to keep the edges square to the grain of the fabric. Be sure the nap is smoothest from the top to the bottom of the pillow.

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

• • • •

• Square • Welt cord stick (optional) • Yardstick

pillows and bolsters

OVERVIEW

7. Make the zipper 1" shorter than the finished width of the pillow (19"). Center the zipper chain over the bottom edge and mark the ends on the backside of the fabric in chalk.

6. Fold one face in half height-wise and cut a tiny notch to mark the middle of the bottom edge.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 339

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

pillows and bolsters

340

8. Place both faces together with good sides facing and edges aligned. To keep the fabric from shifting as you sew, use T-pins or the hand-stapling plier to attach the fabric pieces together around all four sides. Attach the staples as close to the edges of the fabric as possible.

9. Begin sewing ½" inside the mark made for the

10. If you used the hand-stapling plier, remove the staples from step 8 by sliding the tip of the scissors under each one to lift it out.

11. Attach the zipper pull to the zipper chain. Stitch a small piece of doubled-over fabric to each end to prevent the pull from sliding off.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 340

end of the zipper. After ½", backstitch the seam to lock the threads in place. Continue stitching around the pillow, pivoting the fabric under the sewing foot at every corner, until you are ½" past the mark at the other end of the zipper. Backstitch again to lock the threads and remove the fabric from the machine (see page 361 for Locking and Tying Off Stitches in Sewing Tips and Tricks).

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

341 pillows and bolsters

13. Beginning with the end you just finished,

14. Cut off the seam allowance at the corners

15. Turn the pillow right side out and use your fingers to push the corners out to the fullest extent. Then fill with the insert of your choice. I used 14" × 20" cluster fiberfill inserts.

without cutting through the stitch, and remove any staples.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 341

repeat step 12 to attach the other side of the zipper to the other seam allowance.

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

12. Separate the bottom edges of the pillow and lay the zipper facedown with the right half on top of the bottom seam allowance. With the zipper centered on the bottom edge and the right edge lined up with the edge of fabric, place the zipper teeth under the single-welt cord foot and stitch along the right side from one end to the other. As you approach the zipper pull, stop, lift the foot, and move the pull to the rear of the foot.

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

pillows and bolsters

342

Sewing a Bolster with Welt Cord

22"

22"

163⁄4"

Front

Back

Front

163⁄4"

Back

6"

oatmeal linen for ends of bolsters

16. With a square and yardstick, draw the pieces for the bolster on the fabric. The bodies of the pillows should be centered over the striped pattern. Cut out the fabric.

17. Follow the instructions on page 364 to cut and stitch welt cord to go around the ends of each bolster, with an extra 2" per piece for connecting the welt cord ends.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 342

7/9/13 12:15 PM

page

343 pillows and bolsters

19. Wrap a piece of masking tape around the ends

welt cord to help it bend around the circle. Line up the edge of the welt cord tail with the edge of a circle and stitch all the way around until you get back to where you started. Open up the seams in the ends of the welt cord and cut the ends of the cording so they meet.

of cording to hold them together. Place both ends of fabric around the cording (one end of fabric around the other) and fold under the raw edge of the outer fabric. Stitch across the welt cord ends to secure the cording and fabric in place.

20. Repeat steps 18 and 19 for the other bolster ends.

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

18. Make release cuts in the seam allowance of the

21. Repeat step 7 to mark the ends of the zipper on the bottom edge of the bolster. Fold the bolster fabric in half lengthwise with the good side facing inward. Use T-pins or the hand-stapling plier to hold the bottom edge together, with the stripes lined up. Begin stitching toward the end of the bolster, ½" inside the mark made for the end of the zipper. Backstitch the beginning of the seam to lock the threads in place. Stitch until you reach the end, remove the fabric, and repeat for the other end of the bolster.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 343

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

pillows and bolsters

344

22. Repeat steps 10–13 to attach the zipper to the

23. Just as we did with the welt cord, make release

bottom edge of the bolster.

cuts in the seam allowance at the ends of the bolster so the fabric will bend around the circle. With the bolster inside out, lay the seam allowance of an open end on the seam allowance of a circle, good sides facing. To hide the connection in the welt cord, line it up with the bottom seam of the bolster. Place the welt cord under the foot of the sewing machine with the seam allowance to the right, and stitch all the way around the end.

For abnormally sized pillows, like these bolsters, I find it’s more time and cost effective to custom order inserts than make them myself. Companies like Ronco can turn around inserts in a week. All you need to do is provide the finished dimensions and choose a fill!

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 344

24. Inspect the seams to make sure they’re nice and tight around the welt cord, and tighten if necessary. Turn the fabric right side out and stuff the pillow with your filling of choice.

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

Back A

Front A 25. Draw and cut out the pieces for the boxed pilRight A

Bottom A

Top A

Left B Top B

Right B Bottom B

Front B

Back B

lows. The top edge of every boxing piece is sewn to the back face of the case; mark every piece so you can easily determine what goes where when you begin to sew. I’ve chosen two different pillow fronts, one showcasing a large flower, and the other with flowers and a large leaf to highlight the greens. In the yard and a half, I was able to match the top of one of the pillows. The other pillow is as close to matching as possible (see page 208 for pattern matching).

26. With good sides facing and seam allowances

27. With good sides facing, center the bottom

aligned, stitch all four boxing pieces together side by side. Be sure to keep the tops oriented correctly.

edge of the top boxing over the top edge of the front face and hand-staple or pin the two together. Stitch from the top middle to the first corner.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 345

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

Left A

pillows and bolsters

Sewing a Boxed Pillow

345

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

pillows and bolsters

346

28. Make a 45-degree release to either side of the corner so the fabric will lie flat as you sew. Lay the seam flat at the corner and stitch over it until the needle is on the corner. Lift the sewing foot and pivot the fabric 90 degrees. Staple or pin the next side to hold the fabric together and continue stitching. Repeat this step until the boxing is attached all the way around the front face of the pillow.

30. Repeat steps 10–13 to attach the zipper.

29. Repeat step 7 to mark the ends of the zipper on the bottom boxing, and then attach the back face of the pillow to the boxing. With good sides facing, center the bottom boxing over the bottom edge of the back face and staple or pin them together. Repeat steps 9 and 28 to attach the boxing to the back face.

31. To finish, we’ll topstitch around the zipper and seams to keep the edges flat. With pillow right side out and zipper open, place the right half of the zipper teeth under the welt cord foot and stitch along the right side of the zipper on top of the fabric. Make sure the seam allowance of the boxing and zipper is under the fabric while topstitching. Pivot as shown to stitch all the way around the zipper, lifting the foot and moving the pull when necessary.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 346

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

347 pillows and bolsters

are back to where you started, remove the fabric and pull the threads through to the backside of the fabric. Tie a knot in the threads to prevent the stitches from coming undone.

33. Turn the pillow wrong side out and topstitch around the front face of the pillow on the boxing side of the seam. Hold all seam allowances under the boxing as you topstitch and keep an even distance from the seam as you sew. Pivot the fabric at every corner and continue stitching until you’re back to where you started. Repeat step 32 to tie off the threads. Repeat this step to topstitch around the back face of the pillow.

34. Turn the pillows right side out, fill with padding, and sit back and relax.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 347

Ch. 30: Sewing Knife-Edge Pillows, Bolsters, and Boxed Pillows

32. When you’ve stitched all the way around and

7/9/13 12:16 PM

Appendix

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 348

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

349

1 Ventilation. Between stripping, spray

adhesive, and furniture polish, upholstery can be tough on your lungs, so work in a space with a door and/or window, and open them up for fresh air and circulation. 2 Access. Make sure the entrance to your workspace is big enough for large furniture. I once worked on a wingback so large, I couldn’t get it into our old workshop and had to upholster it in the public retail space. Now we have overhead doors for easy access. 3 Breadth. A space doesn’t need to be vast

but should be large enough to move around and flip over a large sofa without knocking into the walls and ceiling. At a minimum, a single car garage is sufficient for both workspace and storage. 4 Light. Bright light is easier on your eyes

and exposes wrinkles and puckers that are unnoticeable in low light. 5 Semi-privacy. Upholstery is loud. Avoid

spaces near sleeping babies or neighbors with noise sensitivity.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 349

Work Surfaces Sawhorses and a large, waist-high table should be two of the first items added to your collection of upholstery treasures. Although you may choose to work only from a tabletop to save on space and setup costs, I find it more efficient and cleaner to use a pair of sawhorses for upholstering and the table for working with and cutting fabric. To protect your furniture, staple carpet to or lay moving blankets over the tops of wooden sawhorses to prevent scuffing and scratching finished wood. Sawhorses with shelves or trays are perfect for keeping tools at your fingertips and giving you a step up to work on tall pieces of furniture.

Setting Up Shop

I’ve visited many upholstery workshops, ranging from storage sheds with dirt floors to spare bedrooms. In fact, my first workspace was a small corner in my husband’s uncooled warehouse. I lost 10 pounds my first year in business sweating out the Texas heat, and it wasn’t until 2011 that Spruce got its first airconditioned workshop. There are a lot of luxuries you can live without, but here are the five things every upholstery workshop needs:

appendix

Setting Up Shop

Tools of the Trade The cost of setting up a complete upholstery shop from scratch can range from $750 to $1,000 plus the cost of a sewing machine, but there are often alternatives to using more expensive tools. For instance, the Klinch-It tool and fasteners at $350+ (see chapter 21, step 8) can be circumvented by hand-sewing springs with a button needle and button twine at a fraction of the cost (see chapter 3, steps 10–17). If you’re working with a limited budget, start with the Essential Tools and pick and choose Specialty Tools as you find a need for or have funds available to purchase them. Tools and padding materials are best purchased through upholstery suppliers. If you don’t have a supplier in your town, refer to Resources for a list of companies who ship or sell online. See the glossary for photos and definitions of the tools listed on the next page.

7/9/13 4:40 PM

ES SENTIAL TOOLS • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Button needle Chalk Curved needles Dressmaker’s tape Electric carving knife Hot glue gun Magnetic tack hammer Measuring tape Permanent marker Pliers Regulator Rubber mallet Ruler Scissors

• • • • • • • • • • •

Screwdrivers Sewing machine and attachments Square Square-point tufting needle Square-point upholstery knife Staple gun Staple remover T-pins Utility knife Webbing stretcher Yardstick

• • • • • • • •

Hole saw Klinch-It Power drill Ripping chisel Spring-loaded tufting needle Tack hammer with nylon tip Water-soluble marker Welt cord stick

SPECIALT Y TOOLS • • • • • • • • •

Air blower Air compressor Air hose Button machine, dies, and fabric cutter Channel stuffer Clamps Dry cleaning pad Gimp stapler Hand-stapling plier

Pneumatic v. Electric The cost and setup required for pneumatic tools can be a deterrent for upholsterers, but the efficiency of an air-powered staple gun makes it a much better option than its electric counterpart. Because electric staplers are less powerful, they often shoot staples in halfway, requiring an additional round of hammering or stapling. If you only plan on upholstering a few, small-scale projects, the cost of the electric stapler may be more suitable for your upholstery aspirations. Otherwise, check out the parts you need for a pneumatic setup.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 350

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

351 appendix

Pneumatic Tools and Supplies

Setting Up Shop

1 The air compressor plugs into an outlet and contains pressurized air for pneumatic tools. 2 The air hose attaches to the air compressor and feeds pressurized air to the tools. 3 A pneumatic staple gun attaches to the air hose and uses air to shoot staples with power. Although general hardware stores may sell pneumatic guns, it’s best to purchase your stapler from a specialty store or upholstery supplier that carries guns made for upholstery. 7-series guns that hold 7-series staples with a ⅜" crown are ideal for upholstery.

1 2

4 This inexpensive air blower attaches to the air hose and comes in handy for chalk tests (see glossary) and dusting off furniture. Since every compressor, hose, and pneumatic tool is different, refer to the instruction manual for each part to safely assemble your pneumatic workstation. Hardware store employees can also help you choose pneumatic tools that are suitable for your needs.

3

4

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 351

7/9/13 4:40 PM

page

352 appendix

Stay Safe Never begin an upholstery project without these simple yet vital safety accessories.

Setting up Shop

1 While stripping furniture or woodworking, wear a dust mask to keep dirt and dust out of your lungs. The dust mask also protects your face from flying tacks and staples. 2 Earplugs can be worn to buffer loud noises caused by hammering, shooting staples, and the air compressor.

4 Goggles or glasses should be worn while stripping furniture and stapling, but I wear mine all day. I’ve even worn them to the grocery store after work, by accident. Also remember to wear thick-soled, closed-toe shoes for comfort and to protect your feet from nails and tacks that have fallen on the floor, and prevent back injuries by keeping a helper handy for moving or flipping large pieces of furniture.

3 Thick, protective gloves help grip and rip fabric while stripping furniture and protect your hands from protruding staples, tacks, and splinters. Remove gloves after stripping, as the details of upholstery require dexterous hands.

1

4

2 3

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 352

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

353

Getting Started Before you start stripping, take several photos of your furniture to reference later. Take overall shots of the front, back, and sides and detailed shots of joints. Connections between seats and arms and the arms and inside backs can be tricky areas that are easier to problemsolve with a reference photo.

Safety Furniture collects a lot of dirt and dust, including other unmentionables. Always strip furniture outside or in a well-ventilated space that is set up to get dirty. Wear goggles, a dust mask, and protective gloves, and get your tetanus shot updated in case you puncture yourself with an old staple or tack. Stripping furniture can be a laborious process, so wear comfortable clothes and closed-toe shoes with thick soles to protect your feet.

What to Keep and Toss If you’re changing out the fabric on a new piece of furniture and you’re happy with the comfort and styling, you can keep virtually all of the padding, provided it doesn’t get

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 353

damaged during fabric removal. Always keep coil springs and marshall units (bound units of springs often found in inside backs and cushions), and leave sinuous springs and steel webbing attached to the wooden frame. Other quality materials, such as down and horsehair, can be cleaned and reused to save on material costs, especially if you’re attempting to restore an antique or heirloom piece to its original condition. Old pieces of padding and fabric, if intact, can help with determining how to put furniture back together. Keep any parts that may be of use during the upholstery process and toss after your piece is complete. Foam eventually disintegrates and loses its ability to bounce back, so it’s best to replace it and all other padding while the furniture is apart rather than taking the chance of it wearing out before you’re ready to upholster again.

Stripping Furniture

The difference between a goodand great upholstery job often comes down to initial preparation. I’ve stripped many pieces that were layered with past upholstery jobs, one on top of the other. Because all of these layers attach in the same place, it creates undefined and bulky edges and makes the attachment of new layers less stable. When rejuvenating furniture, take the time to remove everything down to the wooden frame. Start with a clean slate and replace dusty, disintegrating, and flattened innards with fresh padding. Your upholstery job will look better and last longer.

appendix

Stripping Furniture

Assembled Furniture If you’re having a hard time finding where fabric connects to a piece of furniture, the staples may be hidden between separate pieces that bolt or screw together. Dining and office chairs are the most common types of furniture that assemble, but any piece, from armchairs to sectionals, can be made up of individual parts. When taking assembled furniture apart, label all parts carefully and take plenty of photos to make reassembly easy. Clearly mark screw holes so they’re not covered with padding and fabric, and make notations on the frame about where padding starts and stops and how thick it is. For sets of dining chairs, mark the chair and the removable seat with coordinating numbers so you can easily match the pairs when putting them back together.

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

Stripping Furniture

appendix

354

Supplies • • • • • • • •

Goggles Gloves Staple remover Pliers Wood glue Painter’s tape Fine-grit sandpaper Furniture polish

1. In general, furniture comes apart in reverse order from how it goes together. Start by flipping the piece of furniture upside down on sawhorses.

2. We’ll remove the dustcover and all staples and tacks on the bottom of the frame first. With your nondominant hand, hold the staple remover and place the prongs under a staple or tack. Use your dominant hand to hammer the end of the staple remover with the pliers. When the staple remover is nudged under the staple or tack, roll it back to lift the staple or tack out of the frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 354

3. After you’ve lifted a few feet of staples, go back with the pliers and remove them completely from the frame. With the pliers gripping the staple, roll the nose of the pliers back against the frame instead of trying to pull the staples straight out of the wood.

7/9/13 12:16 PM

page

355 appendix Stripping Furniture

4. There will be several layers of materials attached to the bottom of the frame such as welt cord, fabric, and webbing. Continue stripping until you’re down to bare wood.

5. After the bottom is stripped, remove the outside back and outside arms. If you’re not keeping the fabric and padding, try ripping off multiple layers to remove several staples at once.

6. Once the outside back and arms are removed, it’s often easier to work with the furniture upright. To remove the inside back and arms, you’ll need to release the fabric pulls. Most of the time, the pulls are attached beneath the back and arms and between the back and arms. After releasing the pulls, remove the tacks and staples for the seat fabric, since they’re usually attached to the same location.

7. With all of the staples and tacks removed, pull

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 355

off the inside back, inside arms, and seat (or deck).

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

Stripping Furniture

appendix

356

8. If your furniture has springs, cut off the old twine and remove any coil springs from jute webbing.

9. Stripping can be rough on furniture. If you chip off wood in the process, use wood glue to attach it to its original location and use painter’s tape to hold in place as it dries.

Lost and Found

There’s no telling what you’ll find while stripping furniture. From toys to TV remotes, photos to keys, we’ve found it all. At Spruce, we’re frequently asked, “Will you look for my diamond earring, gold necklace, ring. . . ?” So far, we’ve come up empty-handed, but we do have a pretty hefty change jar we’ve been filling for the last several years.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 356

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

357

termite damage and make repairs as needed. If you’re planning on refinishing the piece, paint or stain before starting upholstery.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 357

Stripping Furniture

11. Check the frame for loose joints and water or

appendix

10. With the frame completely stripped of fabric, padding, staples, and tacks, use a fine-grit sandpaper to buff finished wood, and apply furniture polish to bring out its original luster.

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

Sewing Tips and Tricks

appendix

358

Sewing Tips and Tricks People always tell me they can’t do upholstery because they don’t know how to sew. First of all, you can learn how to do anything. Second of all, if you haven’t already, you will notice that there is very little sewing in these projects, and what there is requires no prior familiarity with the sewing machine. Although the project instructions thoroughly cover sewing decks, boxed arms, and cushions, I thought it may be helpful to put some tips and tricks in one handy section for easy reference.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 358

The Machine Let’s start with the most obvious: the sewing machine. If you plan on making upholstery your favorite hobby or your career, consider investing in an industrial sewing machine. When I started upholstery, I had very little sewing experience and an $80 sewing machine from Walmart. I imagined a fancy, professional machine to be one with hundreds of stitches. To my surprise, professional upholstery only requires one stitch. The biggest difference between a home sewing machine and an industrial machine is brute strength. Although lighter-weight fabrics like linen and cotton easily pass through a home machine, upholstery-weight fabrics, including velvets, vinyl, and leather, can get very thick. These require a machine that has the power to go through all layers. A compound-feed sewing machine has drop feed (a mechanism that moves under the fabric to help push it through) and needle feed (two-part presser feet that move individually to guide and move fabric from above). This machine is a no-frills workhorse and a bit of an investment ($1,000+ new), but it will get you through any upholstery project. If you’d rather test your hand at upholstery before laying down the bucks, a home sewing machine will work well. Just know that you’ll have limitations with the weight of fabrics you can use.

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

359

Top 3 Sewing Machine Attachments 1 Single-welt cord foot. This is singlehandedly my most used attachment. From sewing single welt cord to zippers to ­topstitching seams, I leave this attached for all of them. It’s available in a variety of diameters so you can get a snug fit around different welt cord sizes.

2 Double-welt cord foot. Make decorative trim from any fabric with this sewing foot. 3 Zipper foot. If you’re working with a home machine, this is a good substitute for the single-welt cord foot. Otherwise, use it to stitch closely on either side of a zipper.

Using the Single-Welt Cord Foot to Attach Zipper Chain to Fabric I mentioned that a single-welt cord foot can be used to attach a zipper; now let’s see how it’s done on zipper boxing (see pages 210–211 for attaching hidden zippers). 1. Press under the seam allowances on the edges that attach to the zipper chain and center an ironed edge over the teeth of the zipper. Starting from one end of the zipper, place the zipper teeth under the groove of the welt cord foot and stitch along the right side of the zipper chain to attach it to the fabric. 2. When you reach the other end of the zipper, remove the fabric from the sewing machine and repeat step 1 to attach the fabric to the other side of the zipper.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 359

7/9/13 4:40 PM

page

Sewing Tips and Tricks

appendix

360

Keep it Together I’ve struggled through many sewing projects. With cushions, I’ve always had trouble keeping the corners lined up. Difficult fabrics such as velvet and leather move as you stitch, causing patterns to misalign and seams to pucker. The absolute, number one, key ingredient to successful sewing is pinning or stapling layers together. I prefer the stapler, but in the event that your material is too thick for the staples to go through or you’ve run out of staples, pin it with T-pins. Line up your layers and insert pins perpendicular to the stitch line. Use as

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 360

many or as few pins as you’d like as long as they’re doing an ample job of holding the materials in place. As you stitch, remove the pins before the presser foot reaches them to avoid breaking the sewing needle or your machine. Using a hand-stapling plier is a much faster way of keeping fabrics together. Align the fabrics and staple near the cut edges so the needle never stitches over the staples. Remove the staples with the tip of your scissors or a staple remover when you’re finished sewing.

7/9/13 12:17 PM

Locking and Tying Off Stitches

Sewing Tips and Tricks

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 361

appendix

Just as important as keeping the fabric together when you sew is keeping the seams from coming apart. Stitches at the beginning and end of a seam will loosen over time, so it’s important to backstitch or tie the threads to prevent this. To backstitch, stitch ½", reverse the machine to stitch backward to where you started, and stitch forward over the first ½" again. This method is best used for hidden areas since the repeated sewing of the first ½" does create a noticeable buildup of threads. For visible seams, like topstitching, pull the top thread from the first stitch through to the back of the fabric and tie it in a double knot with the bottom thread.

page

361

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

Sewing Tips and Tricks

appendix

362

Sharp Turns Ahead Although stapling and pinning keep puckers from occurring (caused by fabric stretching or bunching unevenly), they don’t prevent all wrinkles and puckering along seams. Keeping fabric flat and smooth while you stitch is another essential component for clean and professional-looking sewing, and curves and corners are often problem areas. When sewing around curved edges,

make small release cuts in the seam allowances of both layers of fabric.

At 90-degree turns, perform release cuts

and pivot the fabric under the sewing machine to prevent fabric from bunching at the corners. Here’s how:

1. As you approach the corner, make two or three

2. For projects with welt cord, raise the presser

release cuts in the seam allowance of the fabric that is turning the corner. If you’re attaching welt cord around the edge of pillow, make the release cuts in the welt cord rather than the pillow face. The same applies to boxing that is sewn around the edge of the cushion. Pre-bend the cut material so it’s in the desired location around the corner when the sewing needle reaches it.

foot when the needle reaches the corner and pivot the fabric 45 degrees. Hand-turn the sewing needle two stitches to stitch across the corner.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 362

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

363 another 45 degrees and continue sewing along the next side.

90 degrees when you reach the corner. Then continue stitching along the next side.

Sewing Tips and Tricks

4. For projects without welt cord, pivot the fabric

appendix

3. Lift the presser foot and pivot the fabric

Topstitching Is your project sewn together but missing that finishing touch? Topstitch for extra stability and to keep seams flat and clean. After seaming fabric together, turn the fabric right side out and lay the seam flat. For a single topstitch, stitch ¼" to ½" to the right of the seam with both seam allowances lying

flat underneath. With this method, you may choose to topstitch either side of the seam. For a more decorative finish, lay the sewn seam flat with seam allowances under their respective sides. Topstitch one side of the seam then turn the fabric around to topstitch the other side.

Single topstitch

Double topstitch

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 363

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

Sewing Tips and Tricks

appendix

364

Making Single Welt Cord Since welt cord is so common in upholstery projects, keep this step-by-step instruction for cutting and sewing cording at your fingertips.

Supplies • • • • • •

Fabric Welt cord stick or yardstick White or yellow chalk Scissors Sewing machine Single- and double-welt cord feet (match the size of your fiber flex welt cord) • Thread • Fiber flex welt cord (to the desired diameter)

1. Use the welt cord stick or a yardstick to draw 1½"-wide strips of fabric on the bias (at a 45-degree angle). Continue drawing until you have the necessary length for your project and mark the top ends of all the strips.

A

2. Cut out the fabric strips and line up a marked end next to an unmarked end. Cut the ends to be complementary 45-degree angles.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 364

B

3. Place the strips together with good sides facing and the complementary edges aligned to form the shape of an A. Move the strip on top toward the bottom strip by ½". Stitch from points A to B to connect the ends.

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

365 appendix Sewing Tips and Tricks

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the strips of fabric

5. Starting with an end, center cord on the wrong

are sewn together to make one continuous length of welt cord fabric.

side of the fabric and fold the fabric around it until the edges meet. Place the fabric-wrapped cord under the single-welt cord foot and stitch along the right side.

6. Open up and lay fabric seams flat to minimize bulk. Continue stitching until you reach the other end of the fabric.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 365

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

Making Double Welt Cord

Sewing Tips and Tricks

appendix

366

1. Repeat steps 1–4 from making single welt cord but make the strips 3" wide instead of 1½". Center one cord on the wrong side of the fabric and fold the fabric around it until the edges meet. Cut out a second piece of cording as long as the strip of fabric and place it on top of the fabric, directly next to the first piece of cording.

2. While holding the cords tightly together, flip

3. Hold the double welt cord tightly together and place it under the double-welt cord foot with one cord under each groove and the needle in between. Stitch from one end to the other, stopping to split seams, and wrap the fabric around both cords as you go.

4. After the double welt cord is sewn, cut the

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 366

both to the right so fabric encapsulates them.

excess fabric off the back as short as possible without cutting the double welt cord.

7/9/13 12:17 PM

When All Else Fails, Hand-Sew

page

367 appendix

For small areas that can’t be sewn with a machine, use the slipstitch.

Sewing Tips and Tricks

1. Thread a curved needle, meet the ends of the

2. Insert the needle directly next to where it came

thread, and tie them off with a knot. Insert the needle into the seam and pull it through from the backside of the fabric just beyond the area that needs to be sewn together.

out in the last step and pull it out approximately ¼" below.

3. Repeat step 2, moving back and forth across the two pieces that need to be sewn together. When you have closed up the seam, use the curved needle to make a tiny knot in the fabric so the hand sewing does not loosen or come undone.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 367

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

Sewing Tips and Tricks

appendix

368

FASQ (Frequently Asked Sewing Questions)

What needles do I need? Your sewing machine will require specific size needles depending on the model and brand, so check the user’s manual for this information. Needle types also vary depending on the type of material you’re sewing. If you’re sewing leather, look for needles made for sewing leather. Quick tip: If your thread is breaking frequently, check your needle. Dull or improperly positioned needles will be the culprits every time.

What type of thread should I use? An important component of durable seams is the thread. Use a bonded nylon thread for all sewing, including outdoor projects. If you’re having trouble finding nylon thread for your machine, read thread labels and use one that is rated for heavy sewing.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 368

When should I change the stitch length? Choosing a stitch length is a matter of aesthetics and functionality. Before sewing any fabric, do a test run to check the stitch length and tension on the fabric you’re sewing. A small stitch length (more stitches per inch of seam) is best used for looser weave fabrics, where the threads of the fabric are more likely to loosen and come out of a seam. For materials like vinyl and leather, use a longer stitch length, and for topstitching and most other fabrics, use a medium stitch length. If you’re sewing something where the seams will never be seen and are not the primary method of holding it together, such as welt cord, use a longer stitch length for faster sewing and to conserve thread. If you have a question you don’t see here, check the sewing machine user’s manual for information on threading the machine, bobbin winding, and other useful tips.

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

369 appendix

Glossary air blower: This attachment for an air

compressor can be used to test chalk and blow dust and dirt off of your furniture. izes air for pneumatic tools such as brad nailers, staple guns, and air blowers, and makes stapling into wood a breeze.

air blower

Glossary

air compressor: This machine pressur-

air hose: Available in a variety of materials

and sizes, this long tube feeds air from the compressor to pneumatic tools. arm pads: Small upholstered pads frequently found atop the wooden arms of Louis chairs and settees. back scroll: Separate upholstered section

on the sides of the back. bias: The diagonal direction of fabric, prefer-

ably 45 degrees. With upholstery, we draw welt cord on the bias. blind tacking: Attaching a material so that the method of attaching it is hidden. Fabric can be blind-tacked by stapling on the backside of the fabric and folding the material over the staples to cover the staple line.

air compressor

bolster: A long, cylindrical pillow frequently used on beds and sofas. boxed arm: An arm with boxing between

the inside and outside arms. boxed cushion: A cushion with boxing between the top and bottom, or back and front, faces. boxed seat: A seat whose fabric is divided into a top face and a boxing to wrap the sides.

air hose

boxing: The part sewn between two faces of

fabric to form a boxed edge. On cushions, this is the part between the top and bottom faces.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 369

7/9/13 12:17 PM

page

Glossary

appendix

370

bridle ties: Hand-sewn stitches used to attach padding to a piece of furniture.

button needle, yet strong enough to hold buttons tightly in place.

burlap: A loosely woven material made

Cambric: See dustcover.

of jute or synthetic fibers, used to create a smooth plane and to seal holes and spaces beneath padding. button dies: Attachments that accompany

a button machine to make buttons of a particular size. button machine: Metal, hand-operated

cardboard tack strip: Rolled ½"-wide strip of cardboard, used to reinforce staple lines and make clean, straight edges. carving knife: Electric knife used for slicing meat and cutting foam to the desired shape.

machine used to make fabric-covered buttons. button needle: A long needle with an eye,

used to string and pull buttons through thick padding. Also used for sewing springs to webbing. See also square-point tufting needle and spring-loaded tufting needle. button tufting: Using buttons to pull in fabric and make indentations in its surface. button twine: The size of this string is

button twine

dainty enough to thread through the eye of a button needle

burlap

cardboard tack strip button die

button machine

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 370

7/9/13 12:18 PM

chalk: Mark guidelines on fabric with white

page

371 appendix

or yellow chalk and use the air blower to erase them. chalk test: Draw small lines in white and yellow chalk. Then use the air blower to see which color comes out the easiest.

der used for filling channels with padding.

channel stuffer

clamps: Tighten clamps around split wood

Glossary

channel stuffer: Two-part metal cylin-

to hold it together while the glue dries, or use clamps to hold furniture to the sawhorses while stripping and upholstering. coil spring: Steel wire shaped into a coil and used for padding seats, backs, and in rare cases, arms. Available in a variety of heights and densities.

clamps

coil springs

chalk test

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 371

7/9/13 4:40 PM

page

Glossary

appendix

372

cotton batting: Padding material made

decorative nailheads

from raw cotton and rolled into a thick sheet. cotton fabric: Fabric made from the

c­ otton plant, washable and ideal for draperies and slipcovers. crown: In upholstery, the peak or top of a rounded surface. Curve Ease: See Pli-Grip. curved needles: C-shaped needles that make hand sewing easy when you have limited access to the backside of the fabric. Dacron: Rolled sheet of polyester batting typically used as the last layer of padding to smooth out lumpiness and imperfections. damask: A reversible, monochromatic, ­ atterned fabric or a fabric with a raised, p ornate pattern, usually made of silk. deck: The upholstered part of a piece of

furniture that covers the seat beneath the cushion(s).

decking

decking: Material, usually beige denim,

used to cover the back or hidden portion of the deck. decorative nailhead: Nails with a

metallic finish or ornate shape, used to cover the raw edges of fabric and give a piece a finished look.

cotton batting

curved needles

Dacron

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 372

7/9/13 12:18 PM

decorative trim: Any embellishment

dry cleaning pad: Small, powder-filled bag used to erase smudges on drawings but also useful as a gentle method for removing dirt on fabric.

diamond tufting: Decorative surface dustcover: Material placed on the bottom

of furniture to catch dust and cover exposed innards. Also known as Cambric. dust mask: Wear a dust mask to filter the

double-rub count: A measure of a

air of dust and dirt before it enters your lungs.

­fabric’s durability.

Glossary

treatment where buttons are pulled in to create indentations, and excess fabric is pleated in between the buttons to create a diamond pattern.

page

373 appendix

added to a piece of furniture for cosmetic purposes.

earplugs: Hammering and stapling can double welt cord: Decorative trim made

by wrapping and stitching fabric around two cords. double-welt cord foot: Sewing

machine attachment with two grooves centered on either side of the sewing needle. Used for making double welt cord.

get very loud, so wear earplugs to protect your hearing.

dry cleaning pad

down: The soft portion of feathers closest

to the body of a bird. Although many refer to any feather filling as “down,” most feather ­padding is a combination of this soft part with full feathers. dressmaker’s tape: Soft and flexible measuring tape ideal for more precise measurements over curved surfaces. dressmaker’s tape

double-welt cord foot

double welt cord

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 373

7/9/13 12:18 PM

page

Glossary

appendix

374

edge roll: Fibrous material densely packed

fabric width: The width of usable fabric

in a tube shape; keeps padding from wearing thin when attached to hard, heavily used areas. Available in various diameter sizes.

from selvage to selvage. Fiberfill: Loose, synthetic (usually polyes-

edge wire: Wire bound to springs; helps

ter) filling used primarily for stuffing throw pillows.

create and shape the edges of the seat or inside back. eight-way tie: A tying method where coil

springs are bound together in four directions (vertically, horizontally, and diagonally both directions), creating eight points of connection on each spring. fabric-covered buttons: Custom-

made buttons covered in the material of your choice. fabric cutter: An attachment for the button machine that cuts fabric into circles that are the appropriate size for button making. fabric repeat: On patterned fabric, the distance between duplicate parts of the pattern. Often there is a vertical and horizontal repeat.

finished wood: The wood on a piece of furniture that is stained and/or finished and intended to be left uncovered and visible. first-aid kit: Keep your bandages handy for the occasional cut, scratch, or scrape. foam: Common padding material used in modern upholstery; comes in a variety of densities and thicknesses. Although most foam is made of polyurethane, soy-based and rubber foams are also available. front scroll: Separate upholstered sec-

tion on the front of arms. gimp: Woven decorative trim used to embel-

lish edges and cover exposed staples and tacks.

foam

edge roll

fabric-covered buttons

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 374

7/9/13 12:18 PM

used in place of pins to hold fabrics together while sewing.

gloves: This safety gear protects your hands

hard welt cord: Firm welt cord with

and helps you grip and rip fabric while stripping furniture. Any type of gloves will do as long as they’re a snug fit and protective.

very little give, typically made of plastic. Great for outdoor upholstery and difficult sewing projects.

goggles: If you don’t wear glasses, put

Hessian: See burlap.

these on to protect your eyes from flying tacks and staples.

hog rings: Small, metal rings that clinch edge wire and/or springs to padding.

page

375

Glossary

hand-stapling plier: Handheld stapler

attaching decorative trim with discreet, tiny staples.

appendix

gimp stapler: Small-nosed stapler used for

hair: Padding material used in traditional upholstery, made from the hair of animals such as the hog and horse. Modern suppliers also produce rubberized hair, a synthetic padding product with the traits of natural hair. hand-sewing twine: Thin but strong

string used for sewing fabric and Dacron to decks by hand.

gimp stapler

hog rings

hand-stapling plier

horsehair

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 375

7/9/13 12:18 PM

hole saw: Cylindrical metal drill bit with teeth on the end, used for cutting out circular holes in wood. In upholstery, a hole saw is used to remove foam around buttonholes for deep button tufting.

page

appendix

376

Glossary

hot glue gun: An electric gun that heats adhesive to a high temperature, used for gluing objects quickly and permanently. Great for invisibly attaching decorative trim to furniture. inside arm: The upholstered section of hole saw

an arm that faces the interior of a piece of furniture. inside back: The upholstered section of the back that faces the interior of a piece of furniture. inside wing: The upholstered section adja-

cent to the inside back and above the inside arms that faces the interior of a piece of furniture. jute webbing: See webbing. Kapok: Natural, loose fiber sourced from the

tropical kapok tree used as a padding material.

hot glue gun

kick pleat: Small, sewn pieces of fabric that attach behind splits in a skirt. Klinch-It: Hand-operated machine that attaches coil springs to webbing using special staples.

klinch-it

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 376

7/9/13 12:19 PM

knife-edge: In sewing, the edge created

magnetic tack hammer: Hammer with a magnetic tip on one side and a hard metal end on the other. Marshall unit: Springs bound together as

a single unit, used for padding cushions, seats, and inside backs.

linen: Natural fabric made from flax yarns.

page

377

Glossary

leather hide: Tanned or treated animal skin that is stripped of hair and preserved, used as an upholstery material or for other goods.

loose seat: A seat that is upholstered with removable padding and fabric, such as cushions.

appendix

by a case (usually a pillow) that is sewn with a plain seam and stuffed to create a plump ­middle that tapers out as it approaches the edges.

masking tape: Thick manila tape used loose back: An inside back that is uphol-

stered with removable padding and fabric, such as cushions.

for blunting and protecting fabric from sharp ­corners of Pli-Grip. matelassé: Fabric with a raised pattern. measuring tape: Rolled metal ruler ideal

for measuring broad dimensions. mohair: Incredibly durable fabric made from

measuring tape

the hair of the Angora goat. moiré: Fabric with a wavy or watery appear-

ance, produced by pressing the material with the wavelike design. nap: The fuzzy ends of fibers of a fabric.

With velvet, we feel the nap of the material to determine which direction is smooth for proper orientation on a piece of furniture.

knife-edge pillows

magnetic tack hammer

masking tape

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 377

7/9/13 12:19 PM

page

Glossary

appendix

378

Naugahyde: A brand of leather-like vinyl, often used to describe any faux leather or vinyl material.

permanent marker: Use a permanent marker to mark guidelines on hidden layers of padding.

outside arm: The upholstered section of

permanent staples: Staples attached

an arm that faces the exterior of a piece of furniture.

with both prongs going all the way into the wood.

outside back: The upholstered section of a back that faces the exterior of a piece of furniture.

picture back: An outside back that

attaches to the front face of the chair and peeks through a finished wooden frame surrounding the outside back.

outside wing: The upholstered section adjacent to the back and above the arm facing the exterior of a piece of furniture.

pleat: Carefully folded fabric used to neatly

painter’s tape: Tape that gently attaches to

Pli-Grip: Continuous length of metal mate-

surfaces without damaging the paint or finish. Use painter’s tape to hold wood chips in place as the glue dries.

rial that attaches to the frame and invisibly secures fabric by gripping it with metal teeth.

tuck under excess material.

pliers: Handheld tool used for tightly grip-

panelboard: Thick and stiff cardboard

ping fabric, staples, and tacks.

material used for constructing detachable panels or creating a solid plane over the hollow frame of a piece of furniture. pattern matching: The act of matching a

polyester: Synthetic material used in fabrics and blended with other natural and synthetic fibers for added durability and stain resistance.

fabric pattern across seams or from one piece to the next to create a fluid transition of fabric across a piece of furniture.

Pli-Grip

pliers

painter’s tape

permanent marker

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 378

7/9/13 12:19 PM

pop line: A length of string tightly attached

ruler: The 12" size is handy for small, precise measurements such as boxing height. rung: A single loop in a coil spring.

power drill: Electric or battery-operated sawhorses: Flat-top wooden structures

printed fabric: Fabric whose pattern is

used for holding furniture at waist height while upholstering.

applied topically with ink and dyes instead of woven into the fibers of the material.

scissors: Sharp scissors are key to mak-

or burlap that aids in attaching and shaping foam.

ing detailed cuts, and long ones are ideal for cutting large pieces of fabric. Keep a pair of inexpensive scissors around for cutting metal and cardboard.

railroad: To orient fabric with the top and

screwdrivers: These hand tools can eas-

bottom toward the selvages and right and left sides at the cut and rolled ends.

ily remove hard-to-reach screws when a power drill is too large to fit.

regulator: A long, needle-shaped tool with a pointed end and a flat end used for tucking in fabric and strings.

regulator

pull: Flap of material made from scrap fabric

ripping chisel: Flat-nosed hand tool used for prying up multiple layers of material during the stripping process.

Glossary

tool used for quickly screwing and drilling.

page

379 appendix

to either side of a piece of furniture, providing an anchor for sewing fabric to the deck.

ripping chisel

rubber mallet: A broad hammer with

a large rubber head used for gently tapping down Pli-Grip or Curve Ease.

rubber mallet

power drill

screwdrivers

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 379

7/9/13 12:19 PM

page

appendix

380

seam allowance: Extra fabric that extends past the seam (typically ½"). self welt cord: Welt cord made with the

same fabric to which it attaches. selvage: The finished edges of fabric woven

to prevent unraveling. Glossary

skirt: Made in a variety of styles, such as box-pleated and ruffled, skirts attach to the bottom edge of furniture to cover the legs and the space between the ground and the seat. skirt stiffener: Stiff material that is cut

to size and placed inside skirt panels to help hold their shape.

sewing machine: The best sewing machine for upholstery has compound feed (drop feed and needle feed) and the ability to attach single- and double-welt cord feet.

slipknot: The most common knot used by

silicone spray: Invisible lubricant in an

slipstitch: A hand-sewing technique that

aerosol can.

invisibly closes fabric by stitching back and forth across a seam.

silk: Fabric made from the fibers produced

by the silkworm. single welt cord: Decorative trim made by wrapping and stitching fabric around a length of cord. single-welt cord foot: Sewing

machine foot with a groove made to fit on top of a cord while stitching. sinuous springs: Zigzag-shaped steel

upholsterers; one side of string moves freely to pull out slack while the other side holds the tension with a knot.

spray adhesive: Glue in an aerosol can, used for attaching padding materials. spring clips: Small metal clips that hold the ends of sinuous springs to a wooden frame. spring-loaded tufting needle:

Button needle that projects a metal tab into the padding, allowing buttons to be attached after a piece is upholstered.

used as a padding material in seats and inside backs.

silicone spray

spray adhesive

spring clips

spring-loaded tufting needle

single-welt cord foot

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 380

7/9/13 12:19 PM

page

381

spring twine

appendix

square

Glossary

square-point tufting needle

spring twine: Twine made of jute used to

tie springs. square: L-shaped measuring device used to mark square edges on fabric.

square-point upholstery knife

square-point tufting needle: The

extra-sharp diamond point on this tufting needle makes it a great alternative to the regular button needle for stringing buttons through tough materials. square-point upholstery knife:

A sharp knife used to cut through edge roll. staple gun: Available in pneumatic, electric, and hand-operated versions, staple guns quickly attach materials to wood. Pneumatic guns shoot staples with the most force, making them the most effortless and time-­ effective option for upholstery.

staple gun

staple line: The space designated for

attaching staples to the frame, usually in a row.

staple remover

staple remover: The sharp tips of this hand tool nudge their way under staples and tacks, making them easy to lift out of the furniture frame.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 381

7/9/13 12:20 PM

page

appendix

382

Glossary

T-pins

thread

tack hammer with nylon tip

staples: Use ⅜"- and ½"-long staples in the

staple gun to attach materials to the furniture frame. stitched Dacron: Rolled sheet of extra-

lofty Dacron held together with cheesecloth stitched to one side. This is primarily used for plump cushions and diamond tufting.

T-shaped deck: A deck with a front edge that extends out in front of the arms. tack band: A small strip of fabric typically used as a decorative element to make a bordered edge or break up a large plane of fabric. tack hammer with nylon tip:

a straight line that allows fabric to fold under and around posts in the furniture frame.

Hammer used for decorative nailheads. The magnetic side picks up tacks while the nylon tip hammers them in without denting or scratching them.

sub-stapling: Attaching temporary staples

thread: For long-lasting seams, opt for

by lifting one side of the nose away from the wood so that only one side of the staple attaches.

nylon thread made for heavy use.

straight cut: A release cut in the shape of

T-cut: A release cut where excess fabric is folded back and a straight cut is made into the corner of a post, allowing the fabric to be folded under on either side.

tight back: An inside back upholstered with permanently attached padding and fabric. tight seat: A seat upholstered with perma-

nently attached padding and fabric. topstitch: A visible stitch made on the

T-pins: Straight pins with a horizontal head

used for holding fabrics in place while stapling or sewing.

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 382

front face of the fabric after it has been seamed together. A topstitch can be made on one or both sides of the seam and is typically used to hold the seam allowance(s) in place.

7/9/13 12:20 PM

torsion springs: Coiled spring with two

upholstery tacks, 10 ounce and 12 ounce: Before staple guns, upholster-

utility knife: Sharp cutting tool used to precisely trim excess fabric just beyond the staple line. vandyking: A method used to join two

pieces of fabric with a seam that is hidden beneath the folds of diamond tufting. velour: A fabric with a soft, velvet-like tex-

velveteen: Cotton fabric with short thick pile and soft texture. vinyl: Nonporous fabric with a smooth or sculpted surface modeled after leather. water-soluble marker: Marker used for drawing guidelines on fabric; the lines disappear when blotted with a damp cloth.

page

383

Glossary

ers used upholstery tacks to attach layers of padding and fabric to furniture. Now we use them to firmly secure spring twine and seat webbing.

velvet: Fabric commonly made from cotton or silk with a thick pile and soft texture.

appendix

straight ends used to add tension and support to an edge wire.

webbing: Rolled strip of jute or synthetic material used to create a structured surface for padding and upholstery. webbing stretcher: Goosenecked hand tool with sharp teeth, used to stretch webbing tightly.

ture and nap.

torsion springs

upholstery tacks

jute webbing

water-soluble marker

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 383

webbing stretcher

7/9/13 4:40 PM

page

Glossary

appendix

384

welt cord: Cord with a circular cross sec-

zipper foot: Sewing machine foot that is

tion, available in a variety of diameters and densities. Used to make decorative single and double welt cord.

slender on one side, used for sewing closely to the teeth of zipper chain.

welt cord stick: Long, 1½"-wide straight

zipper pull: Small attachment made to

open and close the teeth of zipper chain.

edge cut from Masonite and used to draw fabric strips for single and double welt cord. wood glue: Keep wood glue handy for accidental frame damage during the stripping and upholstery process.

zipper foot

wool: Naturally stain-resistant fabric made

from the fleece of sheep. Y-Cut: Cut made in the shape of a Y to release fabric around the flat side of a post in a furniture frame. zipper chain

yard: When referring to fabric, a yard is

36" in length. The width of a yard of fabric varies, though upholstery fabric is generally 54"–57" wide. yardstick: 36"-long ruler used for measur-

ing and marking straight edges. zigzag springs: See sinuous springs.

zipper pulls

zipper chain: Strip of material with teeth

that open and close by pulling a complementary attachment called the zipper pull.

welt cord

wood glue

welt cord stick

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 384

7/9/13 12:20 PM

page

385

Upholstery Tools and Supplies

DecorativeNails.com King Richard Co. www.decorativenails.com DIY Upholstery Supply LLC www.diyupholsterysupply.com Home Depot www.homedepot.com Rochford Supply www.rochfordsupply.com Ronco Industries www.roncofurniture.com Van Dyke’s Restorers www.vandykes.com Waddell Manufacturing Company www.waddellmfg.com

Sewing Machines Consew www.consew.com Juki Corporation www.juki.com

Fabrics Christopher Farr Cloth www.christopherfarrcloth.com Designers Guild www.designersguild.com The Design Connection, Inc. www.thedesignconnection.us

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 385

continued

Fabricut, Inc. www.fabricut.com Garrett Leather Corp. www.garrettleather.com

Resources

C.S. Osborne & Co. www.csosborne.com

Fabrics,

appendix

Resources

GlobalWeave, LLC www.global-weave.com Joanne Fabrics, Inc./JF Fabrics, Inc. www.joannefabrics.com Jim Thompson Fabrics www.jimthompsonfabrics.com Larsen Cowtan & Tout www.cowtan.com/larsen Quadrille Fabrics and Wallpapers, Inc. www.quadrillefabrics.com To purchase any of the fabrics in this book, contact Spruce (www.spruceaustin.com) or visit www.spruceaustin.com/fabrics for a list of all the fabrics I love.

Recommended Reading Barnard, Nicholas. Soft Furnishings: Sewing Home Decorating Projects. Creative Home Arts Club, 2003. Cooke, Jr., Edward S., ed. Upholstery in America & Europe from the Seventeenth Century to World War I. Barra Foundation, 1987. Dampierre, Florence de. Chairs: A History. Abrams, 2006. James, David. Upholstery: A Complete Course, rev. ed. Guild of Master Craftsman Publications, 1999.

7/9/13 12:20 PM

page

386

Acknowledgments I know, from experience,that the acknowledgments in a book are often overlooked or only read by the few people who know they may get a shout-out. I hope that you will take the time to read these last few paragraphs and see who the real authors of this book are, the ones whose names didn’t make the front cover but were as important to its creation. To Deborah Balmuth, whose persistent and encouraging e-mails to submit a book proposal made this project come to fruition much sooner than expected. And to the other ladies and gentlemen at Storey, especially Pam Art, Alethea Morrison, and Pam Thompson, whose countless hours editing, designing, and believing in the importance of this book have made it my biggest professional achievement and have made them all expert upholsterers. To two people with the patience of saints, Ryann Ford and Sean Johnson. Ryann, thank you for your positivity and perfectionism for every photo of every step of every project. This would be half the book (literally) without you. And for the sprinkling of carefully drafted and colored illustrations, I thank Allegra Lockstadt, whom I look forward to working with again. Martha Hopkins, agent, editor, ideainspirer, lunch-mate, and friend, you gave me realistic yet positive expectations for this process and made foreign territory seem familiar and surprisingly attainable. SPRUCETTES, you kept the Spruce ship sailing full steam ahead while I went on a hiatus. Without your months of dedication,

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 386

hard work, and professional and personal support, there would be no book. From running the business and helping with the book in so many ways (Meredith Carmichael), to keeping me virtually connected to the team (Clar Mapes), jumping on any needed task from upholstery to baking (Katherine Baronet), and powering through countless client projects (Frank Barnhouse), you all are amazing, and I could not do it without you! To Jenny O’Connor (photo stylist), Jemima Dawson (designer and friend), and Meredith Carmichael, your feedback and design inspiration have been invaluable in creating this picture-perfect room. To the #1 Spruce fan and head cheerleader, my mom, whom I have amazed every day of my life (she tells me every day) and who amazes me with her tireless support through every tantrum and success, and to my dad and brother, whose calm and happy demeanors bring me peace. Jennifer, your daily video chats have been my connection to the outside world during the writing of this book, and thank you and Justin for making precious baby Kate, who makes me smile. Keith, you are my battery charger. Thank goodness I have you. Your support, in every way, has made Spruce possible. You always know what to say to lift me up, calm me down, and when to show up with a pizza and six-pack of beer. Here’s to spending more time together for many more years, and to listening to me recite upholstery instruction in senility as we grow old together.

7/9/13 4:40 PM

Contributors Thank you, thank you to the special companies and their representatives who showed their support for this project through their time and textile donations.

page

387 GlobalWeave and Mohit Thukral: custom-

made wool rug featured in the living room. JF Fabrics and Stacy Coulter: drapery

hardware. Christopher Farr Cloth: vibrant floral

linen used on the boxed pillows.

Jim Thompson Fabrics, Tim Johnson

The Design Connection (TDC) and

and Mark Farmer of Culp Associates: firebreathing dragon fabric of the wingback chair.

Mitch Martin: plush orange velvet on the sofa. Jonathan Adler: lamps featured in finDesigners Guild and Brad Wright of ID

ished room.

Collection: Louis chair and blue pillow fabric. Larsen: striped fabric featured on the bolster Fabricut and Margie Gomez: cream and

pillows.

black linen for the draperies. Quadrille Fabrics and Wallpapers, Garrett leather: green leather on cock-

Inc. and Diane Wood: speckled fabric used

tail ottoman.

on the slipper chairs.

The decorative background patterns featured in the book are artist interpretations of the ­following fabrics. Chapter 1: Celerie Kemble for Schumacher, Cirrus Clouds Contents and Appendix: Quadrille, Jacks II Louis Chair: Dwell Studio for Robert Allen, Carrington Slipper Chair: Duralee, 36157 Wingback: Philip Gorrivan II for Highland Court, Cosimo Sofa: Dwell Studio for Robert Allen, Grassland Ottoman: Laura Kirar for Highland Court, Anise Star Pillows: Quadrille, Montego I

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 387

7/9/13 12:20 PM

page

388

index A

accents and accessories, 12–17 air blower, 135, 305, 351, 369, 371 chalk test, 52 air compressor and hose, 351, 369 arm pads, Louis chair measuring, 24–25 upholstering, 55–57 arms and wings (wingback chair), upholstering, 175–86

B

batting, cotton, 41, 372 blind tacking fabric, 68, 369 blown fiberfill, 335 bolster with welt cord, 342–44 boxed arms (three-seater sofa) cutting fabric and sewing, 267–70 cutting foam, 265 padding, 262–67 boxed cushions (three-seater sofa) cutting fabric, 299–300 determining size, 294–98 sewing, 300–305 boxed pillow, sewing, 345–47 boxing, 369 pattern-matching on a curve, 98 pillow, 334, 337–38 slipper chairs, 76, 79, 95–96 wingback chair, 142, 145–46, 165, 208–14 bridle ties, 178, 190, 370 burlap, attaching Louis chair, 42–44 slipper chairs, 86–87 three-seater sofa, 243–44 wingback chair, 155–57

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 388

button machine, 111–12, 324– 25, 370 button twine, 349, 370 attaching buttons, 113–15, 117 attaching deck fabric to chair, 170, 255–56 attaching edge roll, 245–46 diamond tufting, 326 hand-sewing coil springs, 32, 34 making a slipknot, 115 buttons adding to finished piece, 117 attaching, 113–17 making, 111–12, 324–25 sizes and options, 113–14

coil springs (three-seater sofa), 233 tying on the seat, 236–42 coil springs (wingback chair), 148–49 tying on the inside back, 187–88 tying springs on the seat, 150–54 cotton batting, 41, 372 Coulter, Stacy, 387 curved edges, sewing, 362 cushions (three-seater sofa), 294–305 cushions (wingback chair), 205–16

C

D

cardboard tack strip, 370 Louis chair dustcover, 68 ottoman dustcover, 330 slipper chair skirt, 132 three-seater sofa, 259–60, 286, 291–92 wingback chair dustcover, 201–2 chalk test, 52, 351, 371 channel back, upholstering, 102–116 channel stuffer, 108, 371 Christopher Farr Cloth, 337, 385, 387 clamps, 314, 371 cluster fiberfill, 335 coffee table, 11, 15, 309, 334. See also ottoman coil springs, checking for and prepping, 154, 353, 356, 371 coil springs (Louis chair), 21, 25 hand-sewing to webbing, 32–34 tying on the seat, 28, 34–40

Dacron, 44, 372 stitched, 321, 382 Dawson, Jemima, 8 deck, three-seater sofa padding, 243–51 sewing and attaching fabric, 252–61 deck, wingback chair breakdown, 174 sewing and attaching fabric, 164–73 decking material, 372 slipper chair, 106–7, 129–30 three-seater sofa, 249, 252– 254, 256 wingback chair, 159–60, 166–67, 169 decorative nailhead, 63, 139, 372, 382 outside of wingback, 194, 198, 203–4 with leather, 316 Design Connection (TDC), 221, 385, 387 design inspiration

7/9/13 4:41 PM

page

389

E

edge roll, 374 Louis chair, 45–46 slipper chairs, 87–88 three-seater sofa, 245–46, 264, 277 wingback chair, 157–58, 177 edge wire, 374 spring tying, 233–42 tack bands, 257 eight-way tie, 28, 40, 242, 374 environmentally friendly materials, 41, 193 essential tools, 350

F

fabric, selecting, 9–13, 217 fabric repeat, 138, 374 Fabricut, 385, 387 Farmer, Mark, 387

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 389

feather fill, 193, 294, 335, 373 fiberfill, 335, 374 foam, 41, 374 environmentally friendly options, 193 foam, cutting, 370 arm pads, 56 boxed arms, 265 chair seat, 88–89 picture back, 58 T-cushion, 206 tight seat, 47

G

Garrett Leather, 309, 385, 387 gimp, 63, 67, 374 gimp stapler, 67, 136, 375 GlobalWeave, 385, 387 Gomez, Margie, 387 green materials, 41, 193

H

hand-sewing, 349 coil springs to webbing, 32–34 connections in the sofa, 289 deck fabric to chair, 170–71 slipstitch, 367, 380 hand-sewing twine, 161, 375 hand-stapling plier, 302, 340, 360, 375 hard welt cord, 270, 375 hole saw, 320, 376 horsehair, 28, 41, 375 reusing, 148, 163, 175–79, 190, 193, 353 hot glue gun, 63, 376

J

JF Fabrics, 385, 387 Jim Thompson Fabrics, 9, 139, 385, 387 Johnson, Tim, 387 Jonathan Adler, 387 jute. See spring twine and webbing

K

kapok, 335, 376 kick pleat, 128, 130–32, 376 Klinch-It tool, 32, 188, 237, 349–50, 376 knife-edge pillow, 339–41, 377

index

Louis chair, 22–23 ottoman, 310–11 slipper chair, 74–75 sofa, 222–23 wingback chair, 140–41 Designers Guild, 21, 385, 387 diamond tufting, 309, 373 example of, 23 ottoman, 318–31 double welt cord, 373 attaching to leather, 316 making, 366–67 making and attaching, 63–67 double-welt cord foot, 359, 373 down-wrapped foam, 220, 294 dragon motif, 9, 139 dustcover, attaching Louis chair, 68–69 making cushion patterns with, 205–6, 295–97 ottoman, 330–31 slipper chairs, 125 sofa, 291–92 wingback chair, 201–2

L

Larsen, 336, 385, 387 leather, 377 calculating number of hides, 312–13 choosing what to use, 313 how to upholster with, 314–16 splicing, 315 venting, 316 linen, 12, 14, 73, 138, 336, 358, 377 locking and tying off stitches, 361 loose back, 275, 377 loose seat, 377 spring tying for, 148–54 Louis chair, 18–69 arm pads, 55–57 burlap, attaching, 42–44 design plan and ideas, 20–23 double welt cord, 63–67 dustcover, attaching, 68–69 edge roll, attaching, 45–46 fabric choice, 12, 21 fabric, attaching to tight seat, 52–54 hand-sewing coil springs to webbing, 32–34 measuring the parts, 24–25, 25 padding, attaching to tight seat, 51 picture back, upholstering, 58–62 supplies overview, 27 tying coil springs, 28–31, 34 tying diagonal rows, 40 tying horizontal rows, 39

7/9/13 12:20 PM

page

index

390 Louis chair (continued) tying vertical rows, 36–38 webbing, attaching, 29–31 yardage calculation, 26–27

M

magnetic tack hammer, 31, 377 marshall unit, 353, 377 Martin, Mitch, 387 mix ’n’ match upholstery guide, 4–5

N

nailhead. See decorative nailhead nap, 26, 52, 377 90-degree turns, sewing, 362–63 No.9 Thompson, 139

O

ottoman buttons, making, 324–25 design plan and ideas, 309–11 diamond tufting, 326–29 dustcover, attaching, 330–31 fabric/leather choice, 11, 309, 313 leather, working with, 313–16 padding, 318–21 sewing the leather, 322–33 supply overview, 317 yardage calculation, 312

P

padding, 41, 193 attaching to a tight seat, 47–51 arm pads, 55–56 in channel backs, 105–9 inside backs, 189–90, 277–78 ottoman, 318–21 picture back, 59–62 slipper chairs, 88–93 sofa deck, 249–51 T-shaped deck, 155–163

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 390

wingback arms, 177–80 padding, types of, 41 panelboard, 104, 133–34, 378 pattern-matching on a curve, 98 patterned fabric, 217 yardage for a large pattern, 146 yardage for a small pattern, 72 picture back, 378 padding and upholstering, 58–62 pillows, 11–12, 16–17, 334–47 bolster with welt cord, 342–44 boxed pillow, 345–47 fabric choices, 336–37 knife-edge pillow, 339–41 planning size, number, style, 334–37 supplies overview, 339 types of fill, 335 yardage calculation, 337–38 zipper installation, 339–41 pleat, 378 avoiding unwanted pleating, 270 box-pleated skirt, 73 diamond tufting, 309, 312, 328–29 disbursing fabric around curves, 110, 184–85 kick pleat, 128, 130–32, 376 Pli-Grip, 117, 372, 377–78 slipper chairs, 121–24 three-seater sofa, 286–89 wingback chair, 198, 200 pliers, 378 gripping leather, 314 removing staples, 54, 57, 101, 354 pneumatic tools and supplies, 351 pop line, 256, 379 power drill, 350, 379 puckers, avoiding, 52, 270 pulls, 48–50, 90–92, 379

Q

Quadrille Fabrics and Wallpapers, 73, 385, 387

R

railroaded fabric, 26, 229, 379 regulator, 67, 123, 288, 328–29, 379 release cuts, 44, 51, 53, 69, 86, 97, 98, 100, 101, 123, 134, 156, 157, 162, 172, 184, 192, 199, 202, 216, 244, 257, 266, 269, 272, 273, 292, 302, 314, 343, 344, 362, 382 ripping chisel, 350, 379 rubber mallet, 124, 135, 288, 379

S

sawhorses, 349, 354, 379 seams, sewing clean, 270 self welt cord, 73, 380 sewing machine attachments, 358–59 needles, 368 stitch length, 368 sewing trips and tricks, 358–68 curved edges, 362 double welt cord, making, 366 hand-sewing, 367 locking and tying off stitches, 361 90-degree turns, 362–63 sewing machine and attachments, 358–59 sewing machine needles, 368 single welt cord, making, 364–65 slipstitch, 367 stitch length, 368 T-pins, using, 360 threads to use, 368 topstitching, 363 zipper chain, attaching 359 silicone spray, 113, 380 silk damask, 2, 21

7/9/13 12:20 PM

page

391

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 391

diagonal rows, 40 horizontal rows, 39 vertical rows, 36–38 spring tying with edge wire, 233–42 attaching springs and spring twine, 236–38 diagonal rows, 242 vertical and horizontal rows, 238–41 spring-loaded tufting needle, 117, 370, 380 square-point upholstery knife, 46, 88, 158, 246, 381 stand-alone piece, 10, 20–21, 138 staple gun, 350–51, 369, 381 staple remover, 57, 354, 381 staples, ⅜" v. ½", 31 stapling leather, 314 stitch length, 368 stripping furniture, 353–57 sub-stapling, 53, 382 symmetry in a room, 10, 15, 72

T

T-cushion construction, 205–17 T-cut, 43–44, 382 T-pins, 360 T-shaped deck padding, 155–63 tack band, 68, 286, 382 slipper chair, 76, 79, 95–100 three-seater sofa, 224–25, 228, 248, 252–60 when to use, 257 tacks and tack hammer, 31, 382 threads to use, 368 three-seater sofa, 218–305 boxed arms, attaching, 271–74 boxed arms, cutting and sewing, 267–70 boxed arms, padding, 262–67 boxed cushions, cutting fabric, 299–300

boxed cushions, determining size, 294–98 boxed cushions, sewing, 300–305 deck padding, 243–51 deck, sewing and attaching fabric, 252–61 design plan and ideas, 220–23 dustcover, attaching, 290–92 edge roll, attaching, 245–47 fabric choice, 9, 221 hand-sewing connections, 289 inside back, attaching, 281–83 inside back, padding, 277–78 inside back, sewing boxed edge, 279–80 inside back, webbing and burlap, 275–76 measuring the parts, 224–28, 228 outside back, upholstering, 284–88 padding, arms, 263–67 padding, inside back, 277–78 padding, straight deck, 243–51 railroaded fabric, 229 sewing a boxed edge, inside back, 279–80 spring tying with edge wire, 233–42 supplies overview, 232 tack band info, 224–25, 228, 248 tack band, sewing and attaching, 251–60 webbing and burlap, arms, 263 webbing and burlap, inside back, 275–76 webbing, seat, 234–36 welt cord, attaching, 290–92 yardage calculation, 230–31 Thukral, Mohit, 387 tight back, 73, 102, 382

index

single welt cord, 380 making, 364–65 stitching, 97, 259, 280, 301 single-welt cord foot, 359, 380 sinuous springs, 39, 380 tying, 83–85 skirt, slipper chair making and attaching, 126–32 slipknot, 115, 380 slipper chairs, 70–135 boxed seat, 82–101 burlap and webbing, attaching, 86–87 buttons, making and attaching, 111–14 channel back, 102–16 cutting foam for the seat, 88–89 design plan and ideas, 72–74 dustcover, attaching, 125 edge roll, attaching, 87–88 fabric choice, 10, 73 measuring the parts, 76–80, 79 outside back, 118–24 padding for seat, 90–93 scroll panels, 133–35 sinuous springs, tying, 82–85 skirt panels, 126–32 supplies overview, 81 yardage calculation, 80 slipstitch, 369, 380 sofa. See three-seater sofa specialty tools, 350 splicing leather, 315 spring clips, 82, 380 spring twine, 31, 35, 64, 83, 150–51, 237–42, 381 spring tying for a loose seat, 149–54 diagonal rows, 154 horizontal rows, 153 vertical rows, 150–53 spring tying for tight seat, 28–31, 34

7/9/13 12:20 PM

page

index

392 tight seat, 382 padding and upholstering, 41–54 tying coil springs, 28–40 venting leather, 316 tools of the trade, 349–52 topstitching, 363, 382

V

vandyking, 322, 329, 383 velvet, 9, 21 140, 377, 383 nap, 26, 52, 377 pillows, 336–37 sewing, 358, 360 ventilation in workshop, 349

W

wallpaper, 8, 10, 12, 14 webbing, 20, 383 reusing steel webbing, 149, 353 webbing stretcher, 30, 86, 235, 383 webbing, attaching Louis chair, 29–31, 61 slipper chairs, back, 102, 119 slipper chairs, seat, 82, 86–87 three-seater sofa, arms, 263

622137_Spruce_FinalPgs_218-392.indd 392

three-seater sofa, seat, 234–36 three-seater sofa, inside back, 275–76 three-seater sofa, outside back, 285 wingback chair, arms, 175–76 wingback chair, inside back, 187–88 wingback chair, outside back, 195 welt cord, 384 hard welt cord, 270, 375 making and attaching, 63–67 self welt cord, 73, 380 using a gimp stapler, 67 welt cord stick, 63 wingback chair arms and wings, 175–86 deck breakdown, 174 deck fabric, sewing and attaching, 164–73 decorative nailhead, attaching, 203–4 design plan and ideas, 138– 41, 186 dustcover, 201–2 edge roll, attaching, 157–58 fabric choice, 9, 139

front scrolls, 200 horsehair, reusing, 175–79 inside back, 187–92 measuring the parts, 142–45 outside back, 194–99 spring tying for a loose seat, 148–54 supplies overview, 147 T-cushion construction, 205–17 T-shaped deck, padding, 155–63 yardage calculation, 146 Wood, Diane, 387 workshop, 349 Wright, Brad, 387

Y

Y-cut, 44, 244, 257, 271, 384

Z

zipper chain, 211, 384 sewing, 210, 300–301, 339–41 using single-welt cord foot, 359 zipper foot, 359, 384 zipper pull, 211, 213–14, 304, 340, 384

7/9/13 12:20 PM